2005 GMC Envoy, Envoy XL, Envoy Denali,
and Envoy XL Denali Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
“Do Not let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to
unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it and
release the bar. Try to move the seat with your body
to be sure the seat is locked in place.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have this feature, the power seat controls are
located on the outboard side of the front seat cushions.
The horizontal control adjusts the seat cushion and
the vertical control adjusts the seatback.
Power Seats
• Move the front of the seat control up or down to
adjust the front portion of the cushion.
• Move the rear of the seat control up or down to
adjust the rear portion of the cushion.
• Lift up or push down on the center of the seat
control to move the entire seat up or down.
• To move the seat forward or rearward, slide the
seat control forward or rearward.
• To recline the seatback, press the vertical control
rearward. To raise the seatback, press the vertical
page 1-7 for more information.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Lumbar
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle may have this feature.
If your vehicle has this
feature, there is a knob
located on the outboard
side of the driver’s seat.
The control is located
on the outboard side
of the seat cushion.
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward. Keep in mind that as your
seating position changes, as it may during long trips,
so should the position of your lumbar support.
Adjust the seat as needed.
Turn the knob counterclockwise to increase lumbar
support and clockwise to decrease lumbar support.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The low setting warms the seatback and seat cushion
until the seat temperature is near body temperature. The
medium and high settings heat the seatback and seat
cushion to a slightly higher temperature. You will be able
to feel heat in about two minutes.
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have
heated front seats. The
buttons used to control this
feature are located on
the front door armrests.
The engine must be
To heat only the seatback, press the button with the
words BACK ONLY. An indicator light on the switch
will glow to designate that only the seatback is being
heated. Additional presses will cycle through the
heat levels for the seatback only. Press the horizontal
button again to heat the whole seat.
running for the heated
seat feature to work.
The feature will shut off automatically when the ignition
is turned off.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button with
the heated seat symbol. Press the button repeatedly
to cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium, low and off. The indicator lights above the
button will glow to designate the level of heat selected:
three for high, two for medium, and one for low.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has
power seats, the power
reclining seatback
Reclining Seatbacks
control is located on
the outboard side of
the front seat cushions.
Press the control rearward
to recline the seatback.
Press the control forward
to raise the seatback.
If your vehicle has a manual recliner, lift the lever
located on the outboard side of the seat and push the
seatback rearward to recline the seatback. To return
the seatback to the normal position, lift the lever without
pushing rearward on the seatback and the seatback
will move forward.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Envoy/Envoy Denali
Your vehicle may have a folding rear seat which lets
you fold the seatbacks down for more cargo space.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The head restraints lock into place when raised.
To release the head restraint and lower it, press the
tab located on the top of the seatback.
Pull up on the loop located where the seat cushion
meets the seatback to fold the seat cushion up and
out of the way. This will allow the seatback to fold flat
and increase the cargo area.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear seatback
levers are located on
the outboard side of
the rear seatbacks.
Pull the seatback toward you as you lift up on the lever.
The head restraint will automatically fold out of the
way when the seatback is folded down.
To return the head restraint to the upright position,
reach behind the seat and pull the restraint up until it
locks into place. Push and pull on the head restraint to
make sure that it is latched securely.
To raise the seatbacks, lift up the seatbacks and
push on them until they lock into the upright position.
Push and pull on the seatbacks to make sure that
they are latched securely. Then fold the bottom seat
cushion back into place.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Returning the Seats to an Upright Position
Envoy XL and Envoy XL Denali
The second row seat is a 65/35 split seat which may
be folded and tumbled. Use this feature for gaining
access to the third row seats.
Do the following:
1. Guide the seat to the floor to engage the seat
hooks with the floor pins.
To fold and tumble the second row seat(s), do the
following:
2. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down.
3. Pull the seatback up to return it to the upright
position.
1. Push the head restraints fully down.
2. Fold the seatback flat
on the seat by pulling
up on the front part
of the lever. The lever
is located on the
Entry/Exit to/from the Third Row Seat
To enter the third row seat, you must fold and tumble
the second row seat following the instructions given
previously.
outboard side of the
seat indicated with
a 1 on the handle
cover and side of the
seatback.
If you are exiting the third row with no assistance, do
the following.
1. Pull the handle on the center of the second row
seatback down to release and fold the seatback.
2. Reach around to the side of the second row seat
and pull the back of the seat lever up to tumble
the entire seat.
3. Release the rear set of seat hooks from the floor
pins by pulling up on the rear part of the lever
indicated with a 2 on the handle cover and the
side of the seatback. This enables the seat to be
tumbled forward.
Be sure to return the seat to the upright position when
you are finished. Never use the third row seat as a
seating position while the second row is folded
and tumbled.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding the Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the handle located on the bottom of the
seat cushion to release the seat cushion.
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
2. Lift up the seat, and then pull it forward.
3. Fold the seatback forward until it is flat.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
4. Unhook the elastic loop on the back of the seatback.
5. Flip the panel located on the back of the seatback
forward to make a flat surface.
{CAUTION:
Returning the Seat(s) to an Upright
Position
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can
not wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
To return the seat to its original position, reverse the
steps listed previously in folding the third row seats.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
{CAUTION:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in
a seat and using a safety belt properly.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter...a lot!
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have
to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems
your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Driver Position
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the full
width of the belt to spread impact forces.
If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can
work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both
the belt and your vehicle.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except for
one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the
belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint
locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back
all the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again. If the belt is not long enough, see
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to
take belt restraining forces.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When attached to
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each of the rear outside
passenger positions. Here is how to attach the comfort
guide to the shoulder belt.
1. Find the comfort guide located on a storage clip
between the interior body and the seatback or
in a pocket sewn into the side of the seatback.
Slide the guide off of its storage clip or out of the
pocket.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
3. Your comfort guide may have an adjuster to
lengthen or shorten the cord. If it does, you
can adjust the cord by following these steps.
3.1. Squeeze and hold the ends of the lock (A)
on the elastic cord.
3.2. Pull the loop to shorten the guide or pull
the cord to lengthen the guide.
3.3. Release the lock.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
5. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide back onto its storage clip or
into its storage pocket.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the retractor part of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal, near
frontal or side crash or a rollover.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular
safety belt. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that comes with the extender.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
Child Restraints
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross
the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly
below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs.
It should never be worn over the abdomen,
which could cause severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Older Children
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder
belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash
the child’s upper body would have the restraint
the belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some
age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not weigh
much — until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
For example, in a crash at only 25mph(40km/h),
a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a
240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby
should be secured in an appropriate restraint.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its
airbag system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection that a
child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s weight,
height, and age but also whether or not the
restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle
in which it will be used.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older children,
but not for young children and infants.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate
infant restraints.
appropriate child restraints.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests
toward the center of the vehicle.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see
out the window.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A shield may take the place of hip straps. A
T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are
attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield
has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like
shield that swings up or to the side.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
For many years, add-on child restraints have
used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to
be secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s
belt system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
One system, the three-point harness, has
straps that come down over each of the infant’s
shoulders and buckle together at the crotch.
The five-point harness system has two shoulder
straps, two hip straps and a crotch strap.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
{CAUTION:
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing
child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap
being anchored. Others require the top strap always
to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires
that the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint
unless it is anchored properly.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not
a kit is available.
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in
use an anchor point located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
For 5 passenger vehicles, fold down the head restraint
and route the top strap under it. See Rear Seat
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For 7 passenger vehicles, if the position you are
using has an adjustable head restraint, raise the
head restraint and route the top strap under it.
Top Strap Anchor Location
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Five-passenger Vehicles
For five-passenger vehicles, there is a top strap anchor
for each rear seating position. The anchors are
located on the floor in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Do not use the rear tie-down brackets near the
liftgate for top straps.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position or in the third row seating positions
(if equipped) if a national or local law requires that the
top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored. There is no place to anchor the top
strap in these positions.
Seven-passenger Vehicles
For seven-passenger vehicles, there is a top strap
anchor for each seating position in the second row.
The anchors are located at the bottom rear of the
seat cushion.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. There are anchors
for the outboard seating positions in the second row.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For five-passenger vehicles, the labels are located
above a flap, at the base of the seatback, in the rear
outside seating positions. The anchors are located under
the flap. In order to get to the anchors you will need
to pull the strap at the center of the seat where the
seat cushion meets the seatback. This will allow you to
fold the seat cushion up and out of the way. Lift the
flap to expose the anchors and then lower the seat
cushion. Be sure the cushion is locked into place.
For seven-passenger vehicles, the labels are located
near the base of the seatback in the second row outside
seating positions.
{CAUTION:
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not be
able to protect the child correctly. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
To assist you in locating the
lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each
seating position with the
LATCH system has a label
on the seatback at each
lower anchor position.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of
the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
on page 1-41 if the child restraint has one.
There are no top strap anchors at the third row seating
positions. Do not secure a child seat in these positions
if a national or local law requires that the top strap
be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the
top tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Seat Position
Many child restraints are too wide to be correctly secured
in the center rear seat, although some of them will fit
there. If the center seat position is too narrow for your
child restraint, secure it in a rear outside seat position.
If you secure a child restraint in the center seat position,
follow the instructions in Securing a Child Restraint in
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is
for more information on this including important
safety information.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position, move the seat as far back
as it will go before securing the forward-facing child
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is no top strap anchor at the right front seating
position. Do not secure a child seat in this position if a
national or local law requires that the top strap be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the child
restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. See
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
page 1-62. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt. You should
not be able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and
another frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted airbags
designed for either side impact or rollover deployment.
Roof-mounted airbags are available for the driver
and the passenger seated directly behind the driver
and for the right front passenger and the passenger
seated directly behind that passenger.
8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the inside
rearview mirror will be lit and stay lit when the
key is turned to RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If your vehicle has roof-mounted airbags, the words
AIR BAG will appear on the airbag covering on
the sidewall trim near the driver’s and right front
passenger’s window.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
CAUTION: (Continued)
The roof-mounted airbags are designed to
inflate only in moderate to severe crashes
where something hits the side of your vehicle.
They are not designed to inflate in frontal
or in rear crashes. If the vehicle is equipped
with rollover capable airbags, it has been
designed to deploy the roof-mounted airbags
in the event of a vehicle rollover. Everyone
in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected
from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints”
to the safety belts. All airbags are designed to
work with safety belts but do not replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in
many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more forceful
airbags have provided in the past.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and roof-mounted airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
There is an airbag
readiness light on
the instrument panel
cluster, which shows
the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted airbag for the driver
and the person seated directly behind the driver, it
is located in the ceiling above the side windows.
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted airbag for the right
front passenger and the person directly behind that
passenger, it is located in the ceiling above the
side windows.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. And, if your vehicle has
roof-mounted airbags, never secure anything
to the roof of your vehicle by routing the rope
or tiedown through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an inflating
side impact airbag will be blocked. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according to crash
severity. Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level
for the reduced deployment is about 9 to 16 mph
(14 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 18 to 25 mph (29 to 40 km/h).
(The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.)
Your vehicle may or may not have a roof-mounted
airbag and rollover sensor. See Airbag System
on page 1-52. These “rollover capable” airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes
or during a rollover. A side impact airbag will inflate
if the crash severity is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with
specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags are not
designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, or
rear impacts, because inflation would not likely help
the occupant.
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enable the
sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
seat and the right front passenger’s seat. Seat position
sensors provide information that is used to determine
if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full
deployment.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at a
different crash speed than if the object does not
deform.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-Road
page 4-15 for tips on off-road driving.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and
many side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s
motion is not toward the airbag. Roof-mounted airbags
would not help you in many types of collisions,
including frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear
impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is
not toward those airbags. Airbags should never
be regarded as anything more than a supplement to
safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions or rollovers for the roof-mounted
airbags.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. In the
case of a “rollover capable” roof-mounted airbag, the
sensing system detects that the vehicle is about to
roll over. For both frontal and roof-mounted airbags,
the sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag,
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the right front passenger. For vehicles
with roof-mounted airbags, the airbag modules are
located in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side
windows.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
quickly that some people may not even realize the
airbag inflated. Some components of the airbag
module — the steering wheel hub for the driver’s
airbag, the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s bag or the ceiling of your vehicle near
the side windows — will be hot for a short time. The
parts of the bag that come into contact with you may
be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the
airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off
by using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side
impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the side
windows, the airbag may not work properly. You
may have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel, both the airbag module and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
airbag, or side impact airbag module and ceiling
covering for roof-mounted side impact airbags.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After
an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts
for your airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are not part
of the passenger sensing system.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger’s position. A passenger airbag
status indicator in the rearview mirror will be visible
when you turn your ignition key to START or RUN.
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible on the rearview mirror during the system
check. When the system check is complete, either
the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun
visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child
is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
{CAUTION:
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
Even though the passenger sensing system
is designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and
no one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. General Motors
recommends that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag
is off.
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator in
the rearview mirror will light and stay lit to remind you
that the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the fully upright position,
then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart
the vehicle and have the person remain in this position
for about two minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and then enable the passenger’s
airbag.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
important safety information.
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat cushion
and seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can
affect how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or
other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has
the passenger sensing system. See Adding Equipment
more information about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are airbag system parts in several places around
your vehicle. You do not want the system to inflate
while someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer
and the service manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before
you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers
and addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key
is turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close
to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the driver’s seat), or
the inside rearview mirror can affect the operation
of the airbag system. If you have questions,
call Customer Assistance. The phone numbers
and addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If the airbags inflate you will also need to replace the
driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the airbags have not deployed. The driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety
belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been
in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This vehicle has one
The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in
a safe place. If you lose your keys, you’ll be able to
have new ones made easily using this number.
Your selling dealer should also have this number.
double-sided key for the
ignition and door lock.
It will fit with either side up.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call the
GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command to
for more information.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides
the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key
code number.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
page 2-6.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or
a qualified technician for service.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q (Lock): Press lock to lock all the doors. Press lock
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
again within three seconds and the horn will chirp.
L(Panic): Press the horn symbol to make the horn
sound. The headlamps and taillamps will flash for up
to 30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing
the horn button again, by waiting for 30 seconds, or
by starting the vehicle.
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and
unlock your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
K (Unlock): Press unlock
for the driver’s door to
unlock automatically, the
parking lamps to flash
and the interior lights to
go on. Press the unlock
button a second time within
three seconds to unlock
all the doors.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded
the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
You can program different feedback settings through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). For more information
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter do the following:
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a
KEY FOB # BATTERY LOW message when the
transmitter battery is low.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not
to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Insert a thin coin in the slot between the
covers of the transmitter housing. Gently pry
the transmitter apart.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a
three-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
You can use the remote keyless entry system.
Doors and Locks
You can use your key to unlock your door from the
outside.
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
You can lock or unlock the door from the inside
by sliding the manual lever forward or rearward.
When the door is unlocked, you can see a red area
on the lever.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors
can help prevent this from happening.
The manual lever on each door works only that
door’s lock.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can turn the delayed locking feature on or off. If the
feature is turned off, the doors will lock immediately
when a power door lock switch or remote keyless entry
transmitter lock button is pressed.
Delayed Locking
This feature delays the locking of the doors and the
liftgate when using the power lock or the remote keyless
entry system.
Programming Delayed Locking
The first time you attempt to lock the doors with the
driver’s door open, three chimes will signal that delayed
locking is being used. This can be performed by
using either the power lock switch or the remote keyless
entry transmitter. All doors and the liftgate can be
reopened for up to five seconds from the time the last
door is closed.
To turn the delayed locking feature on or off, do the
following:
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch on the
driver’s door in the lock position.
2. Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock
button twice.
Five seconds after the last door is closed, all the
doors will lock. You can lock the doors immediately by
using the power door lock switch or by pressing the
lock button on the optional remote keyless entry
transmitter a second time.
If the delayed locking feature was on, it will now be off.
If the feature was off, it will now be on.
If the key is inserted in the ignition, this feature will not
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To enter the program mode, do the following:
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30 second program timer will begin.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
Programmable Locking Feature
3. You are now ready to program the automatic
door locks. Select one of the two programming
options listed previously, and press the lock side
of the power door lock switch to cycle through
the lock options. You will have 30 seconds to begin
programming. If you exceed the 30 second limit,
the locks will automatically lock and unlock and
the horn will chirp twice to indicate that you have
left the program mode. If this occurs, repeat
the procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter
the programming mode.
Following are the two locking modes that can be
programmed:
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is shifted
out of PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to lock all the doors when the transmission
is shifted into gear. The following instructions detail how
to program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the two programming options
listed previously before entering the program mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning
the ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock
and unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting will not
be modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30 second program timer will begin.
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available programming
options:
Mode 1: All doors unlock when the transmission is
3. You are now ready to program the automatic
door locks. Select one of the four programming
options listed above, and press the unlock side of
the power door lock switch to cycle through the
unlocking options. You will have 30 seconds
to begin programming. If you exceed the 30 second
limit, the locks will automatically lock and unlock
and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you have left the program mode. If this occurs,
repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1
to re-enter the programming mode.
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 2: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission
is shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to unlock all doors once the transmission is shifted
to PARK (P). The following instructions detail how to
program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the four programming options
listed previously before entering the program mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning the
ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting will not be
modified.
To enter the program mode you need to do the
following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
See your dealer for more information.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside while this feature is in use. If you want to open
the rear door while the security lock is on, unlock the
door and open the door from the outside.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle may have this feature. You can lock the
rear doors so they cannot be opened from the inside
by passengers. To use one of these locks do the
following:
Lockout Protection
1. Open one of the rear doors. You will find a
security lock lever located on the inside edge
of each rear door.
This feature stops the power door locks from locking
when the key is in the ignition and a door is open
to protect you from locking your key in the vehicle.
2. Move the lever down
to engage the safety
lock. Move the lever
up to disengage
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
the safety lock.
3. Close the door.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Liftgate Release
Liftgate/Liftglass
To unlock the liftgate, you may use the power door
locks or the keyless entry system described earlier.
{CAUTION:
On some vehicles the liftglass will also unlock when
the liftgate is unlocked. Press the pushbutton on
the liftglass to open it.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot
see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death. If you must
drive with the liftgate open or if electrical
wiring or other cable connections must pass
through the seal between the body and the
liftgate or liftglass:
To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in
the center of the liftgate. If you open the liftgate,
the liftgate module will lock the liftglass after a
one to two second delay.
Emergency Release for Opening
Liftgate
1. Remove the trim plug, located on the inside of the
liftgate in the center, to expose the access hole in
the trim panel.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See “Climate Control
System” in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2. Use a tool to reach through the access hole in the
trim panel.
3. Pry the left release lever up to the unlock position.
Pry the right release lever up to unlatch the liftgate.
4. Reinstall the trim plug.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.
Power Windows
The controls for the power windows are located
on the armrest on each of the side doors. The
switches operate the windows when the ignition is in
RUN, ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory
switch for each of the passenger’s windows as well.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle will have one of the following sets of power
window switches:
Press down the top of the switch to lower the window
and pull up on the switch to raise the window.
Press the top or bottom of the switch to raise or lower
the window.
If you hold the switch down for three to seven seconds
after the window has been completely lowered or
raised, the window will not operate for about
15 seconds.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Power Rear Quarter Windows
Your vehicle may have power rear quarter windows.
AUTO (Express-down): The driver’s and front
passenger’s window switches have an express-down
feature that allows you to lower the window without
holding the switch down. Press the driver’s or front
passenger’s window switch labeled AUTO to the
second position to activate the express-down feature.
Press the switch to the first position to open the
window to the desired level. The express-down feature
can be interrupted at any time by pressing the top
of the switch or pulling up the front of the switch
depending on which model you have.
The switch(es) that operate the windows are located
on the overhead console. See Overhead Console
on page 2-53. The switch(es) allow the driver to open
and close each third row seat window separately.
The ignition must be in RUN, ACCESSORY, or Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) must be active, to use the
power rear quarter windows. See Retained Accessory
Sun Visors
Window Lockout
To block out glare, you can pull the visor down. You
can also slide the visor along the rod from side-to-side
to cover the driver or passenger front window.
o (Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout feature to
prevent passengers from operating the power windows.
The lockout switch is located in front of the window
switches on the driver’s door. A light in the lockout
switch will come on to show that the switch has been
activated. Press the lockout switch again to return
to normal operation.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the sun visor down to expose the vanity mirror.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down and lift the mirror cover to turn on the lamps.
The lamps will turn off when the cover is closed.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here’s how to operate the system:
1. Open the door.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
light should flash.
3. Close all doors. The security light should turn off
after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the security light turns off.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may be equipped with a content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
If a locked door is opened without the key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. The
headlamps and parking lamps will flash for two minutes,
and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will turn
off to save the battery power.
The security light
is located on the
instrument panel
cluster.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock switch
with the door open, or with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. You should also remember that you can start
your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has
been set off.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm.
When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch is
not operational.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any
door with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by
pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The alarm won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any
other way.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
Testing the Alarm
Passlock®
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system that
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system is
disabled and the vehicle will not start.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
During normal operation, the security light will turn off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
If the engine is running and the security light comes
on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock® system is not
working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.
Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this
time. You may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses
for service.
• Do not drive at any one speed, fast or slow,
for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make
full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear
and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only
with your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in.
If it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while
you turn the key hard. If none of this works,
then your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Positions
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like
the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine
is off.
Notice: Lengthy operation of features such
as the radio in the accessory ignition position
may drain the battery and prevent your vehicle
from starting. Do not operate your vehicle in
the accessory ignition position for a long period
of time.
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different
positions.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will
only be able to remove the key when the ignition
is turned to LOCK.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when
your vehicle is stopped.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features
of your vehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutes
after the ignition key is turned to LOCK.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Your radio, power windows, sunroof (option) and
overhead console will work when the ignition key is in
RUN or ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
RUN to LOCK, these features will continue to work
for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer
than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery
to be drained much sooner. And the excessive
heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while
you hold the ignition key in START. When
the engine starts, let go of the key and let up
on the accelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds
between each try.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If your vehicle has this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature is
designed for shorter drivers, since the pedals cannot
move farther away from the standard position, but can
move closer for better pedal reach. This feature can
be programmed to work with the memory function,
page 2-60.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START and hold it there up
to 15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go
of the key.
2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there as you hold the
key in START for about three seconds. When the
engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,
do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal
down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to
operate.
The toggle switch used
to adjust the pedals is
located on the steering
column.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
Press the switch forward or backward to move the
pedals closer of farther away from you.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater. In
very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, behind the battery.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-Volt AC outlet.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,
the kind of oil you have, and some other things.
Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that
you contact your dealer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the
best advice for that particular area.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displacement on Demand (DoD)
Automatic Transmission Operation
Your vehicle’s engine may be equipped with
Displacement on Demand (DoD). This system allows
the engine to operate on either four or eight cylinders,
depending on your driving demands.
The system determines when to switch into and out
of the four-cylinder mode by first making sure that
certain enabling criteria are met, such as coolant and
oil temperatures, and the transmission being in
either THIRD (3) or FOURTH (4) gear.
There are several different positions for your gear
shift lever.
When greater power demands are required, such as
accelerating from a stop, passing, or merging onto
a freeway, the system will maintain eight-cylinder
operation. When less power is required, such a
cruising at a constant vehicle speed, the system will
automatically enable the four-cylinder mode, allowing
your vehicle to achieve better fuel economy.
PARK (P): This position locks the rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start the engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
will be free to roll — even if your shift lever
is in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel
on page 2-32.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-32. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system. You have to fully apply the
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift
out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever,
press the button on the shift lever and push the shift
lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake
application. Move the shift lever into the gear you
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
If you need more power for passing, and you are:
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push
the accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push
the accelerator all the way down.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when you
are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
You will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if
the transmission shifts too often.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power
but lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed
as you go down steep mountain roads, but then
you would also want to use the brakes off and on.
Four-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read
the part that follows before using four-wheel drive.
You should use 2HI (two-wheel high) for most normal
driving conditions.
You can also use SECOND (2) for starting the vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
selector lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle
is moving forward, the transmission will not shift into
first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
four-wheel drive for an extended period of time may
cause premature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain.
Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in four-wheel
drive for extended periods of time.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping
on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4LO (Four-Wheel Low): This setting also engages
your front axle and delivers extra torque. It sends
maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose
this setting if you are driving off-road in deep sand,
deep mud, and climbing or descending steep hills.
Automatic Transfer Case
If your vehicle is equipped
with four-wheel drive, the
transfer case knob is
located to the right of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel. Use this
knob to shift into and
{CAUTION:
out of four-wheel drive.
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL
can cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
page 2-31.
2HI (Two-Wheel High): This setting is for driving in
most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not
engaged in two-wheel drive. It also provides the best
fuel economy.
A4WD (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is
ideal for use when road conditions are variable. When
driving your vehicle in automatic four-wheel drive, the
front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is sent to
the rear wheels. When the vehicle senses a loss of
traction, the system will automatically engage four-wheel
drive. Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel
economy than 2HI.
NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
information.
An indicator light in the knob will show you which position
the transfer case is in. The indicator lights will come on
briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on.
4HI (Four-Wheel High): This setting should be used
when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy
roads or in most off-road situations. This setting also
engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle
to your dealer for service. An indicator light will flash while
shifting the transfer case. It will stay on when the shift is
complete. If for some reason the transfer case cannot
make a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen
setting.
Turn the knob to 4LO. You must wait for the 4LO indicator
light to stop flashing and stay on before shifting the
transmission into gear.
If you turn the knob to 4LO when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds,
the transfer case will return to the setting last chosen.
If the service four-wheel drive light on the instrument
panel cluster stays on, you should take your vehicle
to your dealer for service. See Service Four-Wheel Drive
Shifting Out of 4LO (Four-Wheel Low)
Shifting Into 4HI (Four-Wheel High)
or A4WD (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive)
To shift from 4LO to 4HI, A4WD drive, or 2HI your
vehicle must be stopped or moving less than
2 mph (3.2 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N)
and the engine running. The preferred method for
shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving
1 or 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to 4HI,
A4WD or 2HI. You must wait for the 4HI, A4WD, or
2HI indicator light to stop flashing and stay off before
shifting your transmission into gear.
Turn the knob to 4HI or A4WD. This can be done at any
speed unless you are shifting out of 4LO. The indicator
light will flash while shifting. It will remain on when
the shift is complete.
Shifting Into 2HI (Two-Wheel High)
Turn the knob to 2HI. This can be done at any speed
unless you are shifting out of 4LO.
If the knob is turned to 4HI, A4WD, or 2HI when your
vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI, A4WD, or
2HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds. It will
not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving
less than 2 mph (3.2 km/h) with the transmission
in NEUTRAL (N).
Shifting Into 4LO (Four-Wheel Low)
To shift to 4LO, the vehicle’s engine must be running
and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than
2 mph (3.2 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have
your vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting into NEUTRAL
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
Before shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL, first
make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll.
To shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL, do the
following:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Start the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
3. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Shift the transfer case to 2HI.
4. Turn the transfer case knob to the desired
position (2 HI, 4HI, or A4WD).
5. Turn the transfer case knob all of the way past
four-wheel low and hold it there for a minimum
of 10 seconds. The neutral indicator light will
come on.
5. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL,
the indicator light will go out.
6. Release the parking brake.
6. With the engine running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R) for one second, then shift
the transmission to DRIVE (D) for one second,
to ensure transfer case is in NEUTRAL.
7. You may start the engine and shift the transmission
to the desired position.
7. Turn the engine off, by turning the key to
ACCESSORY.
8. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your foot and pull up on the parking brake lever
located between the seats. If the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light on the instrument panel cluster will
If you are towing a trailer and you must park on a hill,
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can
press in the button at the end of the lever. Hold the button
in as you move the parking brake lever all the way down.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To shift into PARK (P), do the following:
Shifting Into Park (P)
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your foot and set
the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the side of the shift lever and pushing the
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. With four-wheel drive,
your vehicle will be free to roll — even if your
shift lever is in PARK (P) — if your transfer
case is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL.
put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. If you are pulling a
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. You know
your vehicle is in PARK (P) if the key can be
removed from the ignition.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold
the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you
can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without
first pressing the button on the console shift lever. If you
can, it means that the shift lever was not fully locked
into PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle could
move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking
pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to
pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called
“torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking
brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you
leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
will be free to roll — even if your lever is
in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear — not NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running unless
you have to.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply the regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down
to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even
if the climate control fan is at the highest
setting. One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirrors
{CAUTION:
Manual Rearview Mirror
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, it
will be free to roll — even if the shift lever
is in PARK (P) — if the transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel
While sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust
the rearview mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up
or down and side to side. The day/night control, located
at the bottom of the mirror, adjusts the mirror to
reduce headlamp glare from behind during evening or
dark conditions. Turn the control clockwise for night use;
return it to the center for daytime use.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-55.
The vehicle may have a rearview mirror with the
OnStar® system.
Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the
bottom of the mirror. See your GM dealer for more
information on the OnStar® system and how to
page 2-47 for more information about the services
OnStar® provides.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirror Operation
Compass Display
While sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust
the rearview mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip it in the center to move it up or down
and side to side. The day/night control, located at the
bottom of the mirror, adjusts the mirror to reduce
headlamp glare from behind during evening or dark
conditions. Move the control to the right for night
conditions. Return it to the center for daytime.
O(On/Off): Press this button to turn the compass
on or off. The compass display, can show a maximum
of two characters. For example, NE is displayed for
north-east.
When the ignition and the compass/temperature
feature are on, character boxes will appear for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the direction the vehicle is facing.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
Compass
Compass Calibration
When on, the compass automatically calibrates as
the vehicle is driven. If, after two seconds, the display
does not show a compass direction, (N for North,
for example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item. If the
letter C should ever appear in the compass window,
the compass may need calibration.
The vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror
with an eight-point compass display located in the
upper right.
Mirror Operation
While sitting in a comfortable position, adjust the
rearview mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip it in the center and move it up or down
and side to side. The day/night control, located at
the bottom of the mirror, adjusts the mirror to reduce
headlamp glare from behind during evening or dark
conditions. Push the control for daytime use; pull it
for night use.
Press and hold the on/off button for nine seconds to
activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display shows
a direction.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror
is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will
be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain conditions, such as during a long-distance,
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, the compass could give false
readings. To adjust for compass variance do the
following:
1. Find the current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Once a zone number appears in the display,
press the on/off button quickly until the correct
zone number appears in the display. If C appears
in the compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” explained
previously.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Display
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar® and Compass
O(On/Off): Press this button to turn the compass
on or off. The compass display, can show a maximum
of two characters. For example, NE is displayed for
north-east.
The vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror with
OnStar® and an eight-point compass display located
in the upper right.
Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the
bottom of the mirror. See your GM dealer for more
services OnStar® provides.
When the ignition and the compass/temperature
feature are on, character boxes will appear for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the direction the vehicle is facing.
Compass Calibration
Mirror Operation
When on, the compass automatically calibrates as
the vehicle is driven. If, after two seconds, the display
does not show a compass direction, (N for North,
for example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item. If the
letter C should ever appear in the compass window,
the compass may need calibration.
While sitting in a comfortable position, adjust the
rearview mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip it in the center and move it up or down
and side to side. The day/night control, located at
the bottom of the mirror, adjusts the mirror to reduce
headlamp glare from behind during evening or dark
conditions. Push the control for daytime use; pull it
for night use.
Press and hold the on/off button for nine seconds to
activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
shows a direction.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is
set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain conditions, such as during a long-distance,
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, the compass could give false
readings. To adjust for compass variance do the
following:
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Once a zone number appears in the display,
press the on/off button quickly until the correct
zone number appears in the display. If C appears
in the compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” explained
previously.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition and the compass/temperature
feature are on, character boxes will appear for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the direction the vehicle is facing and the outside
temperature.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature
The vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror with an
eight-point compass and temperature display located
in the upper right.
To set the temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius, do the
following:
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
1. Press and hold the on/off button until either a
flashing F or C appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display to
the desired unit of measurement. After about
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be
locked in and the compass/temperature display
will return.
Mirror Operation
While sitting in a comfortable position, adjust the
rearview mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip it in the center and move it up or down
and side to side. The day/night control, located at
the bottom of the mirror, adjusts the mirror to reduce
headlamp glare from behind during evening or dark
conditions. Push the control for daytime use; pull it for
night use.
Compass Calibration
When on, the compass automatically calibrates as
the vehicle is driven. If, after two seconds, the display
does not show a compass direction, (N for North,
for example), there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item. If the
letter C should ever appear in the compass window,
the compass may need calibration.
Temperature and Compass Display
O(On/Off): Press this button to turn the compass and
temperature display on or off. The compass display,
can show a maximum of two characters. For example,
NE is displayed for north-east.
Press and hold the on/off button for nine seconds to
activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display shows
a direction.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror
is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will
be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain conditions, such as during a long-distance,
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, the compass could give false
readings. To adjust for compass variance do the
following:
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Once a zone number appears in the display,
press the on/off button quickly until the correct
zone number appears in the display. If C appears
in the compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” explained
previously.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature and Compass Display
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®, Compass, and
Temperature Display
O(On/Off): Press this button to turn the compass and
temperature display on or off. The compass display,
can show a maximum of two characters. For example,
NE is displayed for north-east.
The vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror with
OnStar® and an eight-point compass and temperature
display located in the upper right.
Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the
bottom of the mirror. See your GM dealer for more
information about the OnStar® system. Also, see
about the services OnStar® provides.
When the ignition and the compass/temperature
feature are on, character boxes will appear for about
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display
the direction the vehicle is facing and the outside
temperature.
To set the temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius, do the
following:
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
1. Press and hold the on/off button until either a
flashing F or C appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display
to the desired unit of measurement. After about
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be
locked in and the compass/temperature display
will return.
Mirror Operation
While sitting in a comfortable position, adjust the
rearview mirror so you can see clearly behind your
vehicle. Grip it in the center and move it up or down
and side to side. The day/night control, located at
the bottom of the mirror, adjusts the mirror to reduce
headlamp glare from behind during evening or dark
conditions. Push the control for daytime use; pull it
for night use.
Compass Calibration
When on, the compass automatically calibrates
as the vehicle is driven. If, after two seconds,
the display does not show a compass direction,
N for North, for example, there may be a strong
magnetic field interfering with the compass.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Such interference may be caused by a magnetic
antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder, or a similar
magnetic item. If the letter C should ever appear in
the compass window, the compass may need
calibration.
Press and hold the on/off button for nine seconds to
activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in
circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display shows
a direction.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror
is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will
be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain conditions, such as during a long-distance,
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for
compass variance, the compass could give false
readings. To adjust for compass variance do the
following:
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears in the display.
3. Once a zone number appears in the display,
press the on/off button quickly until the correct
zone number appears in the display. If C appears
in the compass window, the compass may need
calibration. See “Compass Calibration” explained
previously.
1. Find the current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to adjust
the driver’s or passenger’s mirror so that you can see
a little of the side of your vehicle. After adjusting
the position of the mirrors, turn the knob to the center
position so that the mirrors cannot move.
Outside Manual Mirrors
If the vehicle has the manual outside mirrors, adjust
each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen while sitting in a comfortable,
driving position.
If the travel position in any direction of the mirror is
reached, it will enter a ratcheting mode. This action is
harmless. It is a warning that the mirror can go no
further. To stop this action, back the mirror up by
moving the knob in the opposite direction.
Both mirrors can be manually folded inward by pulling
them towards the vehicle. Push the mirrors away
from the vehicle, to the normal position, before driving.
Outside Power Mirrors
Outside Curb View Assist Mirror
The vehicle may have this feature.
If the vehicle has this feature, the passenger’s outside
mirror will adjust to a preset tilt position while the vehicle
is in REVERSE (R) gear. Curb view assist may be
useful when you are parallel parking. The mirror
will return to normal position when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE (R) gear. Automatic mirror movement
in either direction will follow a short delay.
The control is located
on the driver’s door.
You may be able to turn this feature on or off through
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
Outside Convex Mirror
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services.
{CAUTION:
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com
or www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the
OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane,
you could hit a vehicle. Check your inside
mirror or glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger’s outside mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com.
OnStar® Services
Outside Heated Mirrors
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe
and Sound Plan is included for the first year. You can
extend this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions and Connections Plan to meet your needs.
For more information, press the OnStar® button to speak
with an advisor.
If the vehicle has this feature, when the rear window
defogger is turned on, the outside driver’s and
passenger’s rearview mirrors also heat to help clear
them of ice, snow, and condensation. See Dual Climate
information.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Personal Calling
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
Safe and Sound Plan
• Advanced Automatic Collision Notification
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
capability is an available hands-free wireless phone
that is integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placed
nationwide using simple voice commands with no
additional contracts and no additional roaming charges.
To find out more about OnStar® Personal Calling,
refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in the vehicle’s glove
box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com;
or speak to an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
• Information and Convenience Services
• Online Concierge
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling
that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
stock quotes, entertainment, and more. Customize
your information profile at www.myonstar.com. See the
OnStar® user’s guide for more information.
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System
A steering wheel control can be used to interact with the
OnStar® personal calling feature.
Press the control with
this symbol on the
steering wheel to place
a phone call.
When calling into voice mail systems, or to dial directory
numbers, press the control, say the number(s), then
say “dial.”
See the OnStar® user’s guide for more information.
HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three hand−held
transmitters used to activate devices such as gate
operators, garage door openers, entry door locks,
security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink® information can be found on the Internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the
Internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System Operation
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Programming HomeLink®
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® buttons while keeping the indicator
light in view.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.”
You do not want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase
all previous programming.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and
released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for
at least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to “time out” in the same manner.
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink®” with the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal
has been successfully accepted by HomeLink®.
The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink®” to complete.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink®” shown earlier in this
section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can
be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” following this section.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
Storage Areas
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
Do not release the button.
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling the side of the handle
towards the driver side.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink®” shown earlier in this section.
Overhead Console
Your vehicle may have this feature. The overhead
console may include a reading lamps, HomeLink®
on page 2-49 for more information.
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
If your vehicle has a third row seat, and has a power
operated rear quarter glass, the switches for operating
the rear quarter glass are also located in the overhead
console. These switches allow the driver to open
and close each third row seat window separately.
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
) (Driver’s Quarter Glass): Press button downward
to open or upward to close the drivers side (left)
quarter glass for the third row seat.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink®
at 1-800-355-3515, or on the Internet at
www.homelink.com.
( (Passenger’s Quarter Glass): Press button
downward to open or upward to close the passengers
side (right) quarter glass for the third row seat.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Console Storage Area
Luggage Carrier
If your vehicle has this console compartment, squeeze
the front lever while lifting the top to open it.
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle’s console will be equipped with cupholders
located on the front and rear of the storage
compartment.
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
The console may also contain one or more of the
following components:
• Rear Seat Audio Controls
• Rear Seat Accessory Power Outlets
• Rear Climate Control
If your vehicle has the center armrest compartment, lift
the cover by pulling up on the latch handle located
underneath the front edge of the armrest. The storage
area includes slots for cassettes or compact discs.
Assist Handles
A handle above each door can be used when getting
out of your vehicle.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A luggage carrier allows you to load things on top of
your vehicle. The luggage carrier has side rails attached
to the roof, sliding crossrails (if equipped) and places
to use for tying things down. These let you load
some other things on top of your vehicle, as long as
they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 4-43.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier
is locked and cargo is still securely fastened.
To slide the crossrails to where you want them, pull
up on the lever on each side of the crossrail. This will
release the crossrail and allow you to slide it. When
the crossrail is where you want it, press down on
the levers to lock it into place.
When the luggage carrier is not in use, place the
crossrails at the following positions for wind noise
reduction. Place one crossrail at the rear most point of
the vehicle and the other crossrail above the opening
of the rear door.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier
that weighs more than 220 lbs (100 kg) or hangs
over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage
your vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the
slats as far forward as possible and against the
side rails, making sure to fasten it securely.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Compartment Storage
Panel/Cover
{CAUTION:
If you were to carry things on the adjustable
panel when it is in the upper (cargo cover)
position, during a sudden vehicle movement or
a crash, those things could be thrown around
in the vehicle. You or others could be injured.
When it is in the upper position, always secure
any cargo on the floor beneath the
panel/cover.
Upper Position
Your vehicle may have this feature. This upper panel
position can be used as a cargo shade. Insert the
front corners of the panel into the top guides and slide
the panel forward. Press down on the back of the
panel to lock it in place.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Position
Vertical Position
The panel can be stored in the lower position with
either side up. Insert the front corners of the panel into
the lower guides and slide the panel forward. Press
down on the back of the panel to lock it in place.
Plastic grocery bags can be attached to the hooks
on the panel. Insert the front corners of the panel into
the vertical guides behind the seatbacks and slide
the panel down.
Notice: Loading objects that weigh over
200 lbs (90 kg) onto the panel may cause damage.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not load heavy objects on the panel.
Notice: If you use the panel as a barrier for large
objects in the cargo area while the seatbacks
are folded down, the panel may be damaged.
Do not use the panel as a barrier between large
objects in the rear cargo area and the seating area.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Floor Storage Lid
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have this feature. A convenience
net in the rear of your vehicle helps keep small items in
place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts.
The net is not designed to retain these items during
off-road use. The net is not for larger, heavier items.
{CAUTION:
If any removable convenience item is not
secured properly, it can move around in a
collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle
could be injured. Be sure to secure any such
item properly.
To use the convenience net, do the following:
1. Attach the upper loops to the retainers on both
sides of the liftgate opening. The label should be
in the upper passenger’s side corner, visible
from the rear of the vehicle.
2. Attach the lower hooks to the rear cargo tie downs
on the floor.
Your vehicle has a rear cargo area with a removable
storage lid.
To remove the rear floor storage lid, do the following:
1. Press the latch release and lift up the latch handle.
2. Raise the lid slightly to unhook it.
Cargo Cover
If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.
To install the cargo cover, do the following:
1. Align the endcap with the pocket in the trim panel
located behind the rear seat.
2. Squeeze the opposite endcap, align it with the
pocket located on the opposite side of the trim
panel and release.
3. Pull the lid toward you to release it from the forward
mounting tabs.
To reinstall the rear floor storage lid, reverse the
previous steps. Make sure the lid is secure by applying
slight pressure to the latch until you hear it click.
3. Grasp the handle and unroll the cover. Latch the
posts into the sockets on the inside of the vehicle
to secure it.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the cargo cover, do the following:
Cargo Tie Downs
1. Release the cover from the latch posts and carefully
roll it back up.
There may be cargo tie
downs in the rear of your
vehicle that allow you
to strap cargo in and keep
it from moving.
2. Squeeze one endcap and remove it from the
pocket in the trim panel.
3. Remove the cargo cover from the other endcap so
that you can remove the shade from the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store
it in the proper storage location. When you put
it back, always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sunroof
Vehicle Personalization
The vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close the sunroof, the ignition
must be on or accessory, or Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) must be active. See Retained Accessory
Memory Seat
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls
for the memory function
are located on the
driver’s door.
Press and release the
back of the control in the
overhead console to
open the sunroof. Press
the front of the control
to close the sunroof.
These buttons are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seating position, both outside
mirror positions and the adjustable pedals, if equipped.
The settings for these features can be saved for up
to two drivers.
Once the sunroof is closed, press the forward side of
the control to open the sunroof to the vent position.
To store the memory settings, do the following:
The sunroof has a sunshade which can be pulled
forward to block sun rays. If it is in the closed position,
it will open when the sunroof is opened.
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both of the outside mirrors
and the adjustable pedals, if equipped, to the
desired position.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will
sound to let you know that the position has been
stored.
To store the easy exit seat position, do the following:
1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for three seconds. The seat will move to
the stored memory position.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow
the preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the easy exit seat button for
three seconds. A double chime will sound to
let you know that the position has been stored
for the selected button 1 or 2.
To recall the memory settings, press and release
button 1 or 2 while the vehicle is in PARK (P). A single
chime will sound and the memory position will be
recalled.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow
the preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
To recall the easy exit seat position, do one of the
following:
Easy Exit Seat
• Press the easy exit seat button on the memory
control while the vehicle is in PARK (P). The
seat will move to the stored exit position.
The control for the easy exit seat function is located on
the driver’s door below the memory buttons 1 and 2.
The easy exit seat button is used to program and recall
the desired driver’s seat position when exiting/entering
the vehicle. The mirrors, power lumbar, recline and
adjustable pedals, if equipped, positions will not
be stored or recalled when using the easy exit seat
function. The seat position can be saved for up to
two drivers.
• Or, if the easy exit seat feature is activated in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), removing the key
from the ignition will move the seat to the exit
position. See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle
on activating this feature in the DIC.
If an easy exit seat position has not been stored, the
default position is all the way rearward.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
Brightness Control. See Instrument Panel Brightness
on page 3-17. Fog Lamp Button (If Equipped).
K. Driver Information Center (DIC) Steering Wheel
Controls. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-49.
L. Transfer Case Controls. See “Automatic Transfer
Traction Assist Button. See Traction Assist
D. OnStar® and Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See
page 3-20.
Q. Rear Window Washer/Wiper. See “Rear Window
page 3-10.
R. Rear Window Defogger. See “Rear Window
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols on the
steering wheel pad.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem. Your
front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Tilt Wheel
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
on top of the steering
column.
You should adjust the
steering wheel before you
drive. The tilt lever is
located to the left of the
steering column, under the
turn signal lever.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in
the ignition.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to
a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the
wheel in place.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash
in the direction of the turn
or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals
• 2 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
• Flash-to-Pass Feature
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it. The bottom of the outside
rearview mirrors may also be equipped with lane change
indicators.
• N Windshield Wipers
• J Windshield Washer
• I Cruise Control (If Equipped)
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn
signal.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 5-91 and check for burned-out bulbs.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring
for the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher
is used. With this flasher installed, the signal indicator
will flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check
the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make
sure they are working.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal
lever to the off position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return
to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wipers
Rainsense™ Wipers
Your vehicle may be equipped with Rainsense™
windshield wipers. When active, these wipers are able
to detect moisture on the windshield and automatically
turn on the wipers.
8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go.
The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want
more wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
The moisture sensor is located next to the inside
rearview mirror and is mounted on the windshield.
9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
To turn on the Rainsense™ feature, the wipers must be
set to one of the five delay settings on the multifunction
lever. Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivity
of the rainsensor. For more wipes, select the higher
settings; for fewer wipes, select the lower settings
located closer to off on the multifunction lever.
N (Windshield Wipers): Turn the band to control
the windshield wipers.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain
or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time. The
closer to the top of the lever, the shorter the delay.
The rainsensor will automatically control the frequency
of the wipes from off to high speed according to the
weather conditions. The wipers can be left in a
rainsense mode even when it is not raining.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away from
you to the first solid band past the delay settings. For
high-speed wiping, turn the band further, to the second
solid band past the delay settings. To stop the wipers,
move the band to off.
Notice: If you do not turn off the windshield
wipers when driving through an automatic car
wash, you could damage the wipers. Always turn
off the windshield wipers before entering an
automatic car wash.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Washer/Wiper
Windshield Washer
This control is located
L(Windshield Washer): To spray washer fluid on
the windshield, press the windshield washer paddle.
The wipers will clear the window and then either stop
or return to your preset speed.
to the left of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the control to either 1, 2,
or 3. For delayed wiping, turn the control to 1 or 2.
For steady wiping, turn the control to 3. To turn the
wiper off, turn the control to 0.
To wash the rear window, press the washer symbol
located in the center of the control.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
window, check the fluid level.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Washer
Cruise Control
Your vehicle may be
equipped with a headlamp
washer system. The
button to operate this
feature is located on the
instrument panel and
functions separately
from your other washer
systems.
If your vehicle has
cruise control, the
controls are located
on the end of the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
To wash your headlamps, press the headlamp washer
button briefly and release to activate the system.
R(On): Move the switch to this position to turn the
cruise control system on.
S(Resume/Accelerate): Move the switch to this
position to resume a set speed or to accelerate.
T(Set): Press this button, located at the end of the
lever, to set a speed.
9(Off): This position turns the cruise control system
off and cancels memory of a set speed.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Setting Cruise Control
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
3. Press the set button at the end of the lever
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The accelerator pedal will not go down.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise light on the
instrument panel cluster
will come on when
the cruise control is
engaged.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
Resuming a Set Speed
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts
off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Press in the set button at the end of the lever until
you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
Each time you do this, you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
slower.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate, the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Headlamps
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may want to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to
keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
Your exterior lamps
knob is located on your
instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
c(Off): Turn the knob to this symbol and release it
to turn off the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and
the automatic headlamps. An indicator will illuminate
when the position is selected. This position is not
available for vehicles first sold in Canada.
• Move the cruise switch to off, or
• Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
i (Automatic DRL/AHS): Turning the knob to
this symbol puts the system into automatic headlamp
mode. An indicator will illuminate when the position
is selected.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the knob to this symbol to
manually turn on the following:
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
• Parking Lamps
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on
at reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
2(Headlamps): Turn the knob to this symbol to turn
on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps.
• The ignition is on.
Headlamps on Reminder
• The exterior lamps knob is in automatic
headlamp mode.
A reminder tone will sound when your headlamps
or parking lamps are manually turned on, the
driver’s door is open and your ignition is in LOCK or
ACCESSORY. To turn the tone off, turn the knob all
the way counterclockwise. In the automatic mode,
the headlamps turn off once the ignition key is in LOCK.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The transmission is not in PARK (P).
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take about one minute for
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is
light outside. During that delay, your instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure
your instrument panel brightness control is in the full
bright position.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your Automatic
Headlamp System will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be on.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the
top of the instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered
or the system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is
off. Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brake,
shift out of park or turn the exterior lamp control to
the off position as described in “Exterior Lamps” listed
previously.
The system may also turn on your lights when driving
through a parking garage, heavy overcast weather
or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems,
so that driving under bridges or bright overhead
street lights does not affect the system. The DRL
and automatic headlamp system will only be affected
when the light sensor sees a change in lighting
lasting longer than the delay.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
Your vehicle may have this feature. Use your fog lamps
for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your
ignition must be in RUN for your fog lamps to work.
Press the knob located
next to the exterior lamps
knob to extend it.
The fog lamp button is
located on the instrument
panel to the right of
the exterior lamps knob.
Turn the knob to adjust the instrument panel lights. Turn
the knob all the way up to turn on the interior lamps.
Press the knob back into its stored position when you’re
not using it.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. Press the
button again to turn them off. A light will glow near
the button while the fog lamps are on. Fog lamps will
turn off whenever your high-beam headlamps are on.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door
unless the dome lamp override is pressed in.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the
thumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamps knob, all
the way up to the top detent position. In this position,
the dome lamps will remain on until they are turned off.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamp Override
Entry Lighting
Your vehicle is equipped with entry lighting.
The dome override button
is located below the
exterior lamps knob.
When a door is opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the dome override button is in the “out” position.
When all the doors are closed, the lamps will stay on for
a short period of time and will then turn off automatically.
If you use your keyless entry transmitter to unlock the
vehicle, the interior lights will come on for a short
time whether or not the dome override is on.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on
when you remove the key from the ignition to help you
see while exiting the vehicle. With the dome override
button in the “out” position, these lights will stay on for a
short period of time and then will go out.
To turn the dome lamps off, press the button. The
dome lamps will remain off when a door is open. This
will override the illuminated entry feature unless you
use your keyless entry transmitter to unlock the vehicle.
To return the lamps to automatic operation, press the
button again. The dome lamps will come on when
you open a door.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located in the console for front
passengers and on the headliner for rear passengers.
Press the lens on the lamps to turn the reading lamps on
and press the lens again to turn the lamps off.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove the cover from the outlet to use the outlet.
Be sure to put the cover back on when not using the
accessory power outlet.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy and vanity
if they are left on for more than 20 minutes when
the ignition is off. This will keep your battery from
running down.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adaptor fuses. If you experience
a problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power outlets.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following
to return to normal operation:
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
• Shut off all lamps and close all doors.
• Turn the ignition key to RUN.
This feature will also turn off the parking lamps and
headlamps under most circumstances, if they are left on.
If you would like to turn them back on, turn the exterior
lamps knob.
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Accessory Power Outlets
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Your vehicle may have accessory power outlets. With
the accessory power outlets, you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
The first two outlets are located below the cigarette
lighter and the rear wiper switch on the instrument panel.
The third outlet is located on the rear of the center
console.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
Your vehicle may have this feature. The ashtray is
removable and fits into the front cupholder.
Dual Climate Control System
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
To remove the ashtray, pull the covered bin out of the
cupholder.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
9(Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
If the knob is in off mode, outside air will still enter the
vehicle, and will be directed based on the position of the
mode knob. The temperature can still be adjusted
using the temperature knob.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: The lever on the
left side of the climate control panel is used to raise or
lower the temperature on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. Slide the lever up or down to adjust the
temperature.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
)(Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of the air
to the instrument panel outlets; then directs most of
the remaining air to the floor outlets. A little air is
directed toward the windshield and the side window
outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper vents
and warmer air to the floor outlets.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: The lever on
the right side of the climate control panel is used to
raise or lower the temperature on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle. Slide the lever up or down to adjust
the temperature. This lever also adjusts the temperature
to the rear seat outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with a little air directed to the windshield
and the side window outlets. The recirculation button
cannot be selected while in floor mode.
When the temperature outside is 0°F (-18°C) or lower,
use the engine coolant heater, if equipped, to provide
warmer air, faster to your vehicle.
#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air-conditioning system on or off. When the button
is pressed, an indicator light will come on and the
system will begin to cool and dehumidify the air
inside of your vehicle. You may notice a slight change
in engine performance when the air conditioning
compressor shuts off and turns on again. This is normal.
h (Recirculation): Recirculation mode is used
to recirculate the air inside of your vehicle. When
this button is pressed, an indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that it is active. Use
this mode to help prevent outside odors and/or dust
from entering your vehicle or to help cool the air inside
of your vehicle more quickly. The air conditioning
compressor will also come on when this mode is
activated. While in recirculation mode, the windows
may fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear
the fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and
increase fan speed.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to choose
from to clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use
the defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture
and warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to
remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
Your vehicle may have this feature. The lines you see
on the rear window warm the glass.
< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is active. The rear window defogger will
automatically turn off approximately ten minutes after
the button is pressed.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to select one of the following modes:
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, this
button will activate them.
-(Defog): This mode directs the air to the floor
outlets, windshield and side window outlets. The
recirculation button cannot be selected while in
defog mode.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Do not attach
a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or
anything similar to the defogger grid.
1(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the side window outlets, with only a
little air directed to the floor outlets. The air conditioning
compressor may run to dehumidify the air to prevent
window fogging. The recirculation button cannot
be selected while in defrost mode. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Air Temperature Display
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
A new outside temperature reading will be displayed
if the vehicle has been off for more than three hours.
If the vehicle has been off for less than three hours, the
old temperature reading may be displayed because
underhood heat is affecting the true outside temperature.
Your vehicle may have the dual automatic climate
control system. With this system you can control the
heating, cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
Since underhood heat can also affect the outside
temperature while the engine is running, it may take
several minutes of driving before the display updates
to the actual outside temperature.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle,
and will be directed to the floor. Press the AUTO button,
the mode button, the fan arrows, or either temperature
knob to turn the system on.
C (Mode): Press this button to manually select the
air delivery mode to the floor, instrument panel, or
windshield outlets. The system will stay in the selected
mode until the mode button is pressed again or the
AUTO button is pressed.
When your vehicle is first started and the climate
control system is on, or if the climate control system
has been turned on, the display will show the driver’s
temperature setting for five seconds. Then it will
show the outside temperature.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise or
lower the temperature on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
The display will show the temperature setting decreasing
or increasing and an arrow pointing toward the driver.
This knob can also adjust the passenger’s side
temperature setting simultaneously if the two zones
are linked.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active, the system will control the inside temperature,
the air delivery mode, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob: Turn this
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to manually raise
or lower the temperature on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle. The display will show the temperature
setting decreasing or increasing and an arrow pointing
toward the passenger. The passenger’s temperature
setting can be set to match and link to the driver’s
temperature setting by pressing and holding the
AUTO button for three seconds. Now, by adjusting the
driver’s side temperature setting, the passenger’s
side temperature setting will follow and both arrows
will appear on the display. The passenger’s side
temperature setting also resets and relinks to the
driver’s side temperature setting if the vehicle has
been off for more than three hours.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet mode will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will run
when the outside temperature is over approximately
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set to
outside air. If it’s hot outside, the air inlet will
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help
quickly cool down your vehicle.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 72°F (22°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s or
passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C), the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C),
the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting may not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation
6(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Some air also comes out of the defroster
and side window outlets. The recirculation button cannot
be selected in floor mode.
To change the current setting, select one of the
following:
w9x (Fan): This button allows you to manually
adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow to increase
fan speed and the down arrow to decrease fan speed.
The display will change to show you the selected
fan speed and the driver’s side temperature setting for
five seconds.
h (Recirculation): Press this button to turn
recirculation mode on or off. When this button is
pressed, an indicator light in the button will also come
on to let you know that it is activated. Recirculation
mode is used to recirculate the air inside of your vehicle.
Use this mode to help prevent outside odors and/or
dust from entering your vehicle or to help cool the air
inside of your vehicle more quickly. Recirculation
mode can be used with vent and bi-level modes, but it
cannot be used with floor, defog or defrost modes.
See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.
C (Mode): Press this button to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle. Keep pressing the
button until the desired mode appears on the display.
The display will change to show you the selected
air delivery mode and the driver’s temperature setting
for five seconds.
You may also notice that the air conditioning compressor
will run while in recirculation mode. This is normal
and will help to prevent fogging.
H(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
If the weather is cold and damp, the system may
cause the windows to fog while using recirculation
mode. If the windows do start to fog, select defog or
defrost mode.
)(Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, then directs
the remaining air to the floor outlets. A little air is
directed toward the windshield and the side window
outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and
warmer air to the floor outlets.
Recirculation mode, if selected, will be cleared when
the engine is turned off.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
#A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to
manually turn the air conditioning system on or off.
When the system is on, the system will automatically
begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside of your
vehicle. The air conditioning symbol will appear on the
display when the air conditioning is on and will turn
off when the air conditioning is off.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. You can use either defog or front defrost
to clear fog or frost from your windshield.
-(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of
fog or moisture. This setting will deliver air to the
floor and windshield outlets.
If you select turn the air conditioning off while in front
defrost or defog mode, the air conditioning symbol
will turn off, however, the A/C compressor will remain
on to help de-humidify the air inside the vehicle. If one of
the other modes is selected the compressor will then
turn the A/C off until it is selected again or the
AUTO button is pressed.
0 (Defrost): Press the front defrost button to clear
the windshield and side windows of frost or fog quickly.
The system will automatically control the fan speed if
you select defrost from AUTO mode. If the outside
temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, your air
conditioning compressor will automatically run to help
dehumidify the air and dry the windshield. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.
< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rear window
Operation Tips
defogger on or off.
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
An indicator light in the button will come on to let you
know that the rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If you need
additional warming time, press the button again.
• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
fan knob all the way to the right for a few moments
before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts
of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of your window.
If equipped, your heated mirrors will also come on when
you press this button.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the
rear window with sharp objects.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the
performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H (Panel): When panel mode is selected in the front
controller, the rear system will distribute air from the
four headliner outlets.
Rear Climate Control System
Envoy
Your vehicle has one of the following rear climate
control systems. With any of these systems, the rear
climate controls will be disabled when the front climate
control system is in defrost. This occurs to provide
maximum airflow to clear the windshield.
) (Bi-level): When bi-level mode is selected in
the front controller, the rear system will distribute air
from the four headliner outlets and the third seat
floor outlet.
6 (Floor): When floor mode is selected in the front
controller, the rear system will distribute air from the
third seat floor outlet.
The temperature of the air coming through the rear
outlets is determined by the front passenger’s
temperature setting. Press the PWR button to turn the
rear climate controls on and off. Use the mode knob
to change the direction of airflow (upper, bi-level or floor)
to the rear seat area.
The rear mode and temperature positions now mimic
the front control system mode and passenger side
temperature.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Envoy or Envoy Denali
Envoy XL
To operate the rear air conditioning system, the front
air conditioning system must be on. With the front
air conditioning system off, the rear system controls can
only be used to circulate air in the rear of the vehicle.
To adjust the airflow
speed, turn the fan knob
(driver override switch),
located on the front
center floor console to 1,
2 or 3. The rear mode
and temperature positions
now mimic the front
control system mode
and passenger side
temperature.
If your vehicle has the rear seat audio system, the
lower buttons are used to adjust the rear seat climate
control system. The temperature of the air coming
through the rear outlets is determined by the front
passenger’s temperature setting.
z9 y (Fan): Press this button to adjust the fan
speed.
To activate the second row seat controls in the
following systems, set the fan knob, located on the
front console, to R.
z\ y (Mode): Press this button to change the
direction of airflow (panel, bi-level or floor) to the rear
seat area.
P (On/Off): Press this button to turn the rear climate
controls on or off.
The rear control will only turn on if the front is on and
not in defrost mode.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the knobs on the control panel to choose a fan
speed, temperature and direction of airflow.
Press the buttons at the bottom of the audio control
panel to adjust the fan speed, mode and temperature for
the rear passengers. The selections will be shown on
the display.
H (Panel): Selecting panel mode will deliver air to the
four headliner outlets.
z9 y (Fan): Press the rear fan control button with
the arrow pointing right to turn the rear climate control
on. Toggle this button to adjust the air flow speed.
To turn the rear system off, toggle the left arrow until
the display turns off.
) (Bi-level): Selecting bi-level mode will deliver
warmer air to the third seat floor outlet and cooler air
to the headliner outlets.
6 (Floor): Selecting floor mode will deliver air to the
floor outlet located in the third seat area.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
z\ y (Mode): Press this button to change the
direction of airflow (panel, bi-level or floor) to the rear
seat area.
zb y (Temperature): Press this button to increase
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays
on when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section
that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice.
and decrease the temperature setting.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information
Center (DIC) that works along with the warning lights
and gages. See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-49.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar
with this section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know
how fast you’re going, about how much fuel you’ve used, and many other thing you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem on the
instrument panel cluster.
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Tachometer
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip stem located on
the instrument panel cluster.
The tachometer
displays the engine
speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs
a new odometer installed. The new one will be set to the
correct mileage total of the old odometer.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle
has been driven since you last set the trip odometer
to zero.
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the
Driver Information Center (DIC). You can set a Trip A
and Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” under
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder
Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
be provided for several seconds to remind people to
buckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt light will
also be provided and stay on for several seconds,
then it will flash for several more. You should buckle
your seat belt.
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will be provided for several seconds to
remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This would only occur if the passenger airbag is
for more information. The passenger safety belt light
will also be provided and stay on for several seconds,
then it will flash for several more. You should have
the passenger buckle their safety belt.
This chime and light will
be repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will be provided.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will be provided.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensors, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a
few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Then the light should
go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly. Have your
vehicle serviced right away.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system, Your
rearview mirror has a passenger airbag status indicator.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF,
or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a
system check. Then, after several more seconds, the
status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the
on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger
seat may not have the protection of the
frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-35.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have
a problem with the charging system. It could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drive belt,
or another electrical problem. Have it checked
right away. Driving while this light is on could drain
your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the
radio and air conditioner.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition
is in RUN, this gage shows
your battery’s state of
charge in DC volts.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem. A chime
may also sound when the light comes on.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between
the low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when
a large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left idling for an extended
period. This condition is normal since the charging
system is not able to provide full power at engine
idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition
should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the
charging system to create maximum power.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning
light on can lead to an accident. If the light
is still on after you have pulled off the road
and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal
is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to
the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still
on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on
for several seconds.
That’s normal. A chime
may also sound when
the light comes on.
United States
Canada
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes,
but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular
brake system warning light is also on, you don’t have
anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular
earlier in this section.
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, it means that
your engine coolant has overheated. If you have been
operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions,
you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and
turn off the engine as soon as possible.
information.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it
is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good,
and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could
lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by
your warranty.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the Light is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
• Reducing vehicle speed
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If the Light Is On Steady” following.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil Pressure Gage
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure
in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine
is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a dangerously low oil level or other problems causing
low oil pressure.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change Engine Oil Light
Security Light
When this light comes on,
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
key toward START.
it means that an oil change
and other maintenance
procedures are required for
your vehicle.
The light will stay on until the engine starts. If the light
flashes, the Passlock® system has entered a tamper
on page 2-18.
Once the engine oil has been changed, the change
engine oil light must be reset. Until it is reset, the light
will be displayed when the engine is on.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,
and you should see your dealer.
additional information regarding the security light.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light may also come on if there is a problem with
the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If this
happens, take the vehicle in for service as soon
as possible.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise light appears
whenever you set your
cruise control.
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
Reduced Engine Power Light
This light is displayed
when a noticeable
reduction in the vehicle’s
performance may occur.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when
the reduced engine power light is on but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. The performance may
be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle.
If this light stays on, see your dealer as soon as possible
for diagnosis and repair.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Four-Wheel Drive
Warning Light
Check Gages Warning Light
The check gages light will
come on briefly when you
are starting the engine.
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, as a check to
show you it is working.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are
driving, check your coolant temperature and engine
oil pressure gages to see if they are in the warning
zones.
The service four-wheel drive light comes on to indicate
that there may be a problem with the drive system
and service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated
by the system before any problem is apparent,
which may prevent serious damage to the vehicle.
This system is also designed to assist your GM dealer
in correctly diagnosing a malfunction.
Gate Ajar Light
If this light comes on,
your liftgate or liftglass
is not completely shut.
Close the liftgate or liftglass. Never drive with the liftgate
or liftglass even partially open.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
Fuel Gage
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
page 5-5.
United States
Canada
Check Gas Cap Light
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have remaining.
If equipped, this light will
come on if your gas cap
is not securely fastened.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took
a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity
to fill the tank.
information.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle may have this feature. The Driver
Information Center (DIC) display is located on the
instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer. The
DIC buttons, if equipped, are located on the steering
wheel. The DIC can display information such as the trip
odometer, fuel economy, customization features, and
warning/status messages.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the DIC steering
wheel buttons, you will not have all of the features listed.
You will scroll through the odometer and trip odometer
by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on
the instrument panel cluster. You will also turn off,
or acknowledge, DIC messages by pressing the trip
odometer reset stem. See Speedometer and Odometer
on page 3-33 for information on features for vehicles
without DIC buttons.
A 3 (Trip Information): Press this button to display
the odometer, trip odometers, and timer.
B t (Fuel Information): Press this button to display
the current range, fuel used, average fuel economy, and
engine oil life.
C 4 (Customization): Press this button to access the
vehicle settings menu and customize the personal
settings on your vehicle.
D r (Select): Press this button to reset certain DIC
functions and set your customization settings.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge
DIC messages and clear them from the DIC display.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Odometer: Press the trip information button until
ODOMETER appears on the display. This mode
shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven
in either miles or kilometers. Pressing the reset
stem located on the instrument cluster with the vehicle
off will also display the odometer.
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing the trip stem will acknowledge
any warning or service messages. Pressing any of
the DIC steering wheel buttons — trip information, fuel
information, customization, or select button — will
also acknowledge any warnings or service messages.
Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP A
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either
miles or kilometers.
Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP B
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either
miles or kilometers.
You should take any message that appears on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
message will only make the message disappear, not
correct the problem.
To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and hold
the select button for one second while in one of the
trip modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A or
TRIP B.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed
by pressing the four DIC buttons located on the
steering wheel. These buttons are trip information, fuel
information, customization, and select. The button
functions are detailed in the following pages.
You can also reset the TRIP A or TRIP B while they
are displayed by pressing the reset stem on the cluster.
If you press and hold the reset stem or the select
button for four seconds, the display will show the
distance traveled since the last ignition cycle for TRIP A
or TRIP B.
Trip Information Button
3 (Trip Information): Press the trip information
button to scroll through the ODOMETER, TRIP A,
TRIP B, and TIMER.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press the
select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last reset, not including time
the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will roll back to zero.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range
is an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button until
FUEL USED appears on the display. This mode shows
the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the
last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
information, press and hold the select button for
one second while FUEL USED is displayed.
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel information
button until AVG. ECON appears on the display.
This mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG),
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km), or kilometers
per liter (km/L) your vehicle is getting based on current
and past driving conditions.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
Fuel Information Button
t (Fuel Information): Press the fuel information
button to scroll through the range, average fuel
economy, instant fuel economy, and the engine oil
life system.
Press and hold the select button for one second while
AVG. ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy
is not reset, it will be continually updated each time
you drive.
Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button until
RANGE appears on the display. This mode shows the
remaining distance you can drive without refueling.
It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in
the tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel level
is low.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel information
button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the
oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you
to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
Customization Button
4 (Customization): Press the customization button
to access the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and
customize the settings to your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Select Button
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. To reset the engine oil life system, use the
fuel button to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen and
then press and hold the select button for five seconds
while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed. OIL LIFE RESET
will appear on the display for 10 seconds to let you
know the system is reset. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 5-18 for more information.
r (Select): Press the select button to reset certain
DIC functions, turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC display, and set your customization settings.
For example, this button will allow you to reset the
trip odometers, turn off the FUEL LEVEL LOW message,
and scroll through and select the desired language
information is displayed on the DIC.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
page 6-4.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK WASHER FLUID
DIC Warnings and Messages
If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
on the DIC. Adding washer fluid will clear the message.
the select button to acknowledge this message and clear
it from the DIC display.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. More than one message may appear at
one time. They will appear one behind the other. Some
messages may not require immediate action but you
should press the trip stem to acknowledge that you
received the message and clear it from the display.
Pressing any of the DIC steering wheel buttons — trip
information, fuel information, customization or select
button — will also acknowledge any warnings or service
messages. Some messages cannot be cleared from
the display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be removed
from the DIC display. The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed and some information
about them.
CURB VIEW ACTIVATED
The CURB VIEW ACTIVATED message is displayed
when the passenger outside rearview mirror moves into
the curb view position. See Outside Curb View Assist
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s door is not fully closed, this message
will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if
the message still appears on the DIC. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
If the battery is not charging during operation, this
message will appear on the DIC. Driving with this
problem could drain your battery. Have the electrical
system checked by your GM dealer as soon as possible.
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT/ENGINE
OVERHEATED
ICE POSSIBLE
If the outside temperature reaches a level where ice
could form on the roadway, this message may appear
on the DIC. If the temperature rises to a safe level,
the message will clear. Press the select button to
acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this message
will appear in the DIC and you will hear a chime. See
of action. This message will clear when the coolant
temperature drops to a safe operating temperature.
KEY FOB # BATTERY LOW
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-26 for more information.
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low,
this message will appear on the DIC. The battery
needs to be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry System
acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the fuel level is low in the vehicle’s gas tank this
message will appear on the DIC and you will hear a
chime. Refuel as soon as possible. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
on page 5-5 for more information.
If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see
if the message still appears on the DIC. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP ENGINE
REAR ACCESS OPEN
If low oil pressure levels occur, this message will
be displayed on the DIC. Stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check your
oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced
If the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is
in RUN, this message will appear on the DIC and you
will hear a chime. Turn off the vehicle and check
page 2-13. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. Press the select button
to acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed
this message will appear on the display and you
will hear a chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
the door for obstacles, and close the door again. Check
to see if the message still appears on the DIC. Press
the select button to acknowledge this message and clear
it from the DIC display.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed, this message
will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if
the message still appears on the DIC. Press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display.
SERVICE AIR BAG
If there is a problem with the airbag system this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have your
GM dealer inspect the system for problems. See Airbag
page 1-52 for more information. Press the select button
to acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
TURN SIGNAL ON
If a problem occurs with the brake system this message
will appear on the DIC. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display.
If the message is still displayed, or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service.
See your GM dealer.
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the
off position. Press the select button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
DIC Vehicle Customization
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program some features to one setting
based on your preference. All of the customizable
options listed may not be available on your vehicle.
Only the options available will be displayed on
your Driver Information Center (DIC).
If the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly, this
message may appear on the DIC and a chime will
sound. Fully reinstall the fuel cap. See Filling the Tank
on page 5-8. The diagnostic system can determine
if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. The DIC message will remain
on until the message is cancelled with the return button
on the steering wheel. The DIC message will also be
cancelled if the ignition is turned off.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
To change feature preferences, make sure the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P).
The DIC message and the Service Engine Soon light
may come on again during a second trip if the fuel cap
is still not tightened properly. See Malfunction Indicator
Press the customization button to scroll through the
available customizable options.
After pressing the customization button, VEHICLE
SETTINGS will momentarily display before going to
a customization option.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
Lock Doors
Press the customization button until LOCK DOORS:
IN GEAR appears in the display. To select your
preference for automatic locking, press the select button
while LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not be
unlocked automatically.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lock
when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
Lock Feedback
For more information on automatic door locks, see
Press the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACK:
BOTH appears in the display. To select your preference
for the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter, press the
select button while LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
Unlock Doors
Press the customization button until UNLOCK DOORS:
IN PARK appears in the display. To select your
preference for automatic unlocking, press the select
button while UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press the
lock button.
UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doors
will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp
the second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock
button.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when unlocking the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it and move on to the next feature.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it and move on to the next feature.
Unlock Feedback
Press the customization button until UNLOCK
FEEDBACK: LAMPS appears in the display. To select
your preference for the feedback you will receive
when unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless
entry transmitter, press the select button while UNLOCK
FEEDBACK: LAMPS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following
choices:
Headlamp Delay
Press the customization button until HEADLAMP
DELAY: 10 SEC appears in the display. To select your
preference for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC is displayed on
the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with
the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (default)
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN
• HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN
• HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
the vehicle. If you choose OFF, the headlamps will turn
off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
Easy Exit Seat
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT:
OFF appears in the display. To select your preference
for seat position exit, press the select button while EASY
EXIT SEAT: OFF is displayed on the DIC. Pressing
the select button will scroll through the following choices:
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Perimeter Lights
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit recall
will occur.
Press the customization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTS: ON appears in the display. To select your
preference for perimeter lighting, press the select button
while PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to
the exit position when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position exit, see “Easy Exit Seat”
PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if
it is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Curb View
Alarm Warning
Press the customization button until CURB VIEW: OFF
appears in the display. To select your preference for
curb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW:
OFF is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button
will scroll through the following choices:
Press the customization button until ALARM WARNING:
BOTH appears in the display. To select your preference
for alarm warning, press the select button while
ALARM WARNING: BOTH is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): The passenger’s outside
mirror will not be tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R).
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
active.
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
the alarm is active.
When the vehicle is placed in PARK (P) or in any
forward gear, the mirror will return to the normal driving
position, following a short delay.
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on tilt mirror in reverse, see Outside Curb
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while your choice is displayed on
the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on alarm warning type, see
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language
Units
To select your preference for display language, press
the select button while LANGUAGE is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following languages:
Press the customization button until UNITS appears in
the display. To select English or metric, press the
select button while UNITS is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
• ENGLISH
• UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH)
• UNITS: METRIC (km/L)
• UNITS: METRIC (L/100 km)
• FRANCAIS (French)
• ESPANOL (Spanish)
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
If you choose ENGLISH, all information will be displayed
in English units. For example, distance will be displayed
in miles and fuel economy in miles per gallon. If you
choose METRIC (km/L), distance will be displayed
in kilometers and fuel economy in kilometers per liter.
If you choose METRIC (L/100 km), distance will be
displayed in kilometers and fuel economy in liters per
100 kilometers.
If you accidentally choose a language that you do not
want or understand, press and hold the customization
button and the trip information button at the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
in their particular language. English will be in English,
Francais will be in French and Espanol will be in
Spanish. When you see the language that you would
like, release both buttons. The DIC will then display the
information in the language you chose.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and exit out of the customizable options.
You can also scroll through the different languages
by pressing and holding the trip reset stem for
four seconds, as long as you are in the odometer mode.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio,
make sure that it can be added by checking with
your dealer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
Setting the Time
The radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to
represent hours and an M or MN to represent minutes.
equipment can be added, it is very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,
or other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. AM or PM will appear on
the display for morning or evening hours. Press and
hold the minute button until the correct minute appears
on the display. The time can be set with the ignition
on or off.
Notice: The chime signals related to seat belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the GM radio/entertainment
system. If that equipment is replaced or additional
equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may
not work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time for
two seconds until UPDATED and the clock symbol
appear on the display. If the time is not available from
the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the display.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Radio with CD (Base Level)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide
the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based
in the 48 contiguous Untied States. XM™ offers
100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
digital quality audio and text information that includes
song title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until you hear a beep. The selected display will
now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AVOL
OFF appears on the display.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or
to decrease the volume.
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing
the following steps:
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears
on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSCN will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that preset
station.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,
MID (without Bose®), or TREB appears on the display.
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease. The display will
show the bass, midrange (without Bose®), or treble level.
If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass, midrange (without Bose®), or treble to
the middle position while it is displayed, push and hold
the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep and
adjust the display level to the middle position.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position
while it is displayed, push the AUDIO knob, then push it
again and hold it until the radio produces one beep.
The balance and fade will be adjusted to the middle
position and the display will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or
speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear
on the display, you will hear a beep, and the display level
will be adjusted to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed for
country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble, returns
the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each
preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose audio system, the
AUTO EQ settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two
seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
release either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to
select and to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
scanning.
4. To go to another station within that PTY, press the
TYPE button then, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows twice to
exit program type select mode.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on the
six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the following
steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
Radio Messages
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, during program
type mode, the PTY that was set will return.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into
an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Locked
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in
another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers cannot
be swapped between vehicles. If this message is received
after having your vehicle serviced, check with your GM
dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go
to the beginning of the current track if more than
eight seconds have played. TRACK and the track
number will appear on the display. If this pushbutton
is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward through the CD.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
the eject button or the INFO knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The inactive CD will remain
safely inside the radio for future listening.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or to the previous track. Press the
right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either
arrow is pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
CD Messages
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or
the TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The
radio will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then
go on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows again, to stop scanning.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Radio with CD (MP3)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide
the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPL knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based
in the 48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers
100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
digital quality audio and text information that includes
song title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the display you want, then press
and hold this knob for two seconds. The radio will
produce one beep and the selected display will now be
the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button
to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear on
the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then
as you drive, automatic volume increases the volume,
as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed. The
volume level should always sound the same to you as
you drive. NONE will appear on the display if the
radio cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until OFF
appears on the display.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or
to decrease the volume.
DISPL (Display): When the ignition is turned off, press
this knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what
appears on the display while using RDS. The display
options are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY,
and the name of the program (if available).
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
o TUNE p: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
3. Tune in the desired station.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
o SCAN p: Press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds. SCAN will appear on the display and
the radio will produce one beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press either arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds. PSCN will appear on the display
and the radio will produce two beeps. The radio will go to
a preset station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,
MID (without Bose®), or TREB appears on the display.
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease. The
display will show the bass, midrange (without Bose®),
or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
To adjust the bass, midrange (without Bose®), or the
treble to the middle position while it is displayed,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position
while it is displayed, push the AUDIO knob, and hold
it until you hear one beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,
push and release the AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM
appears on the display.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose audio system, the
equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
2. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button to select and to take you to the
PTY’s first station.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
3. To go to another station within that PTY, press the
SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY and
then to go to another station.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
4. Press P-TYPE knob to exit program type
select mode.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
IF PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts
traffic announcements is found, the radio will stop
seeking and TRAF will appear on the display.
If no station is found that broadcasts traffic
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
announcements, No Traf will appear on the display.
If TRAF is on the display, press the TRAF button to turn
off the traffic announcements.
The radio will play the traffic announcement if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if
the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Radio Messages
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO will appear on the display.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle and
it must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display,
the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and
when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
No Signl
Loading
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Lock
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your GM dealer.
Radio ID
Unknown
Check XM
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing a CD
1 FLD x (Previous): This pushbutton is inoperable
when using a non-MP3 CD.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in, and READING will appear on
the display. The CD should begin playing. If you want
to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the
eject button or the DISPL knob.
2 FLD w (Next): This pushbutton is inoperable when
using a non-MP3 CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse
at 10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold
it for more than two seconds to reverse at 20 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear
on the display. As each new track starts to play,
the track number will appear on the display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty
in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try
a known good CD.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM and the track number
will appear on the display when each track starts to play.
Press RDM again to turn off random play. RDM OFF
will appear on the display.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. Pressing
either arrow for more than two seconds will scan the
previous or next tracks at five to eight seconds per
track. SCAN and the track number will appear on the
display. Press either arrow to stop scanning.
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
This MP3 player will accept MP3 files that were recorded
on an up to 700 MB CD-R CD. The files can be recorded
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kpbs, 40 kpbs,
56 kpbs, 64 kpbs, 80 kpbs, 96 kpbs, 112 kpbs, 128 kpbs,
160 kpbs, 192 kpbs, 224 kpbs, 256 kpbs, and 320 kpbs
or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available when recorded using ID3 tags versions 1
and 2.
o TUNE p: Turning the TUNE knob will fast track
reverse or advance through tracks. The track number
will appear on the display for each track.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
of the track will appear on the display. To change the
default on the display, track or elapsed time, press this
knob until you see the display you want, then press and
hold the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep and the selected display will now be the default.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files. Long
file, folder, or playlist names or a combination of a large
number of files and folders or playlists may cause the
player to be unable to play up to the maximum number
of files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play
large numbers of files, folders, playlists or sessions
minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist name.
You can also play an MP3 CD that was recorded using
no file folders. The system can support up to 11 folders in
depth, though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum
in order to keep down the complexity and confusion in
trying to locate a particular folder during playback. If a
CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let
you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
items over the maximum will be ignored.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if
this button is pressed first.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Root Directory
Order of Play
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the
root directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory will be accessed prior
to any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px)
will always be accessed before root folders or files.
Tracks will be played in the following order:
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
Empty Directory or Folder
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
will begin from the first track under the root
directory. When all tracks from the root directory
have been played, play will continue from files
according to their numerical listing. After playing the
last track from the last folder, play will begin
again at the first track of the first folder or root
directory.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
No Folder
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See DISPL later in this section for more information.
The new track name will appear on the display.
When the CD contains only compressed files, the
files will be located under the root folder. The next
and previous folder functions will have no function on
a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the radio will
display ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the
song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the
song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio will display the file name without the extension
(such as .mp3) as the track name.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension
of the filename will not be displayed.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which
were created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Playing an MP3
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in, and READING will appear
on the display. The CD should begin playing and the
CD symbol will appear on the display. If you want
to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the
eject button or the DISPL knob.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 RDM (Random): To random the tracks in the current
folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.
FLDR RDM will appear on the display. Once all of the
tracks in the current folder or playlist have been
played the system will move on to the next folder or
playlist and play all of the tracks in random order.
1 FLD x (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton
to go to the first track in the previous folder. Pressing
this button while in folder random mode will take you
to the first track in the previous folder and random
the tracks in that folder.
2 FLD w (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to
go to the first track in the next folder. Pressing
this button while in folder random mode will take you
to the first track in the next folder and random the
tracks in that folder.
To random all the tracks on the CD, press and hold
this pushbutton for two seconds. You will hear a beep
and DISC RDM will appear on the display. This
feature will not work with playlists.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse
at 10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold
it for more than two seconds to reverse at 20 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. REV and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. NO RDM will appear on the display.
o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to the
start of the next track. Pressing either arrow for more
than two seconds will search the previous or next tracks
at two tracks per second. Release the button to stop
searching and to play the track.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to advance at 20 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton
to play the passage. FWD and the elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display.
o TUNE p: Turning the TUNE knob will fast track
reverse or advance through the tracks in all folders
or playlists. The track number and file name will appear
on the display for each track. Turning this knob while
in random will fast track reverse or advance the tracks
in sequential order.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch between
track mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode.
The display will show only eight characters, but there
can be up to four pages of text. If there are more
than eight characters in the song, folder, or playlist
name, pressing this knob within two seconds will take
you to the next page of text. If there are no other pages
to be shown, pressing this knob within two seconds
will take you to the next display mode.
INFO (Information): INFO will appear on the display
whenever a current track has ID3 tag information.
Press this button to display the artist name and album
contained in the tag. INFO will disappear from the
display when the information in the ID3 tag has finished.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
• Track mode will display the current track number
and the ID3 tag song name.
• Folder/playlist mode will display the current folder
or playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if
this button is pressed first.
• Time of day mode will display the time of day and
the ID3 tag song name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the display you want, then press
and hold this knob for two seconds. The radio will
produce one beep and the selected display will now be
the default.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Messages
Radio with Cassette and CD
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible.
See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based
in the 48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers
100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
digital quality audio and text information that includes
song title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
Playing the Radio
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or
to decrease the volume.
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide
the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
To change the default on the display, press the
INFO knob until you see the display you want, then
hold the knob until the display flashes. The selected
display will now be the default.
o TUNE p: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears
on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE
arrows again to stop scanning.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button
to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
To turn automatic volume off, press this button until
AVOL OFF appears on the display.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSCN will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,
MID (without Bose®), or TREB appears on the display.
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease. The
display will show the bass, midrange (without Bose®),
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
To adjust the bass, midrange (without Bose®), or treble
to the middle position while it is displayed, while it is
displayed, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will
produce one beep and adjust the display level to the
middle position.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed for
country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble, returns
the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that preset
station.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each
preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system, the
AUTO EQ settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
release either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to
select and to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY, press the
TYPE button then, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows twice to
exit program type select mode.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position while
it is displayed, push the AUDIO knob, then push it again
and hold it until the radio produces one beep. The
balance or fade will be adjusted to the middle position.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or
speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will appear
on the display, you will hear a beep, and the display level
will be adjusted to the middle position.
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two
seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to
stop scanning.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on the
six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the following
steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
Radio Messages
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, while in PTY
select mode, the PTY that was set will return.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Locked
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for
previous to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous selection on the tape if the current selection has
been playing for less than three seconds. If pressed when
the current selection has been playing from three to
13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of the previous
selection or the beginning of the current selection,
depending on the position on the tape. If pressed when
the current selection has been playing for more than
13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of the current
selection.
Playing a Cassette Tape
The tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled
sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject
button to remove the tape and start over.
If the ignition and radio are off, the tape can be inserted,
but will not play until ignition and radio are on. If the
ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to −9.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The cassette
tape symbol will appear on the display and an arrow
showing which side of the tape is playing. The tape
player will play the other side of the tape when it
reaches the end.
2 NEXT: The tape must have at least three seconds
of silence between each selection for next to work.
Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the
tape. Pressing this pushbutton multiple times, in next
mode, will increase the number of selections to be
searched forward. SEEK and a positive number
will appear on the display.
Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players will
work in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits”
later for more information.
The tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to quickly
reverse the tape. The radio will play while the tape
reverses. Press it again to return to playing speed.
The station frequency and REV will appear on the
display. Select stations during reverse operation by
using TUNE and SEEK.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to quickly
advance the tape. The radio will play while the
tape advances. Press this pushbutton again to return to
playing speed. The station frequency and FWD will
appear on the display. Select stations during forward
operation by using TUNE and SEEK.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape
or CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape
or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a tape when it is
not playing. Eject may be activated with the radio off.
5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other
side of the tape.
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the display, the tape will not play due to one of the
following errors:
© SEEK ¨: The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If either arrow is pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving forward or
backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or negative number will appear on the display.
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily,
the tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your
player is working properly.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next selection, play for 10 seconds,
then go on to the next selection. Press either the SCAN
or the TYPE arrows again, to stop scanning. The
tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for scan to work.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head.
Attempt to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still
play tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible
to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good cassette.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD part way into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
the eject button or the INFO knob.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player with the
cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature
on your tape player.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
To activate the bypass feature, perform the following
steps:
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display
and the tape symbol on the display will flash,
indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot.
It will power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
beginning of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. TRACK and the track number will appear on
the display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving backward
through the CD.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM and the track number
will appear on the display when each track starts to play.
Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play.
RDM OFF will appear on the display.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or to the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either arrow
is pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to quickly reverse within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE
arrows again, to stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then press and
hold the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep and the selected display will now be the
default.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to quickly advance within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to advance at 17 times
the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the
track will appear on the display.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Listening to a DVD
If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened to through your vehicle’s
speakers. To listen to the DVD, press the TAPE
DISC button until RSE appears on the radio display.
The current radio source will stop and the DVD sound
will come through the speakers. To stop listening to
the DVD, press the TAPE DISC button, if a cassette
tape or a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button
to select a different source.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
CD Messages
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
will go off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appear
on the radio display. The radio will return to the last
radio source that you were listening to.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
more information.
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Radio with Six-Disc CD
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide
the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based
in the 48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers
100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
digital quality audio and text information that includes
song title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until you hear a beep. The selected display will
now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system
on and off.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button
to select MIN, MED, or MAX. AUTO VOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
To turn automatic volume off, press this button until
AUTO VOL OFF appears on the display.
o VOLUME p: Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
o TUNE p: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever
that numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return for that pushbutton.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or
the TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCN appears
on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE
arrows again to stop scanning.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSC will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that preset
station.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until
BASS, MID (without Bose®), or TREB appears on the
display. Turn the knob to increase or to decrease.
The display will show the bass, midrange (without
Bose®), or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass, midrange (without Bose®), or treble
to the middle position while it is displayed, push and
hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep
and adjust the display level to the middle position.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FAD appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward
the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position
while it is displayed, push and hold the AUDIO knob.
The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display
level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTERED
will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTERED
will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system,
the equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for
two seconds, and the radio will begin scanning
the stations in the PTY.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to
stop scanning.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either the
TYPE or the SEEK arrows to select and to take you
to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY, press the
TYPE button then, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows twice to
exit program type select mode.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. You can view the last message until a
new message is received or a different station is
tuned to.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing
the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
Radio Messages
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, while in PTY
mode, the PTY that was set will return.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for the vehicle and
must be returned to your GM dealer for service.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Locked
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of
time, your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your
GM dealer.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
slot, to turn green.
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD part way into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
MULTI LOAD # will appear on the display.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # will appear on the display, load
a CD. Insert the CD part way into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light will begin
flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and
turns green, you can load another CD. The CD player
takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load more than six.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will appear on the display.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD will
be automatically pulled back into the player. If CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25-second time
period is complete, the player will sense an error
and will try to eject the CD several times before
stopping.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button, then press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD. A small bar will appear under
the CD number that is playing and the track number will
appear on the display.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The
player’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of
eject, causing the player to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
CD Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).
{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the CD eject button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
EJECT ALL will appear on the display.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD # will
appear on the display. The CD will eject and can
be removed.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light will
begin flashing again and another CD will eject.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or the
eject button.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use repeat, do the following:
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is pressed more than once, the player will
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
©SCAN ¨: To scan one CD, press and hold
either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until
TRACK SCAN appears on the display and you hear a
beep. The radio will go to the next track, play for
10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press either
SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
the following:
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until ALL CD
SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep.
Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track
of each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again,
to stop scanning.
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. To change the
default on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then press
and hold the knob until you hear a beep. The selected
display will now be the default.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played.
For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”
listed previously in this section.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order they were saved.
Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK or TYPE
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return
to the first saved track.
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following
steps:
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear on the display. If
S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button
to turn it off.
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select the
desired track to be deleted.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK or TYPE right
arrow to locate the track to be saved. The track will
begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep will be heard immediately. After
two seconds of continuously pressing the SONG
LIST button, two beeps will be heard to confirm that
the track has been deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save
the track into memory. When SONG LIST is
pressed, one beep will be heard immediately.
After two seconds of continuously pressing the
SONG LIST button, two beeps will sound to confirm
the track has been saved.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks
are moved up the list. When another track is added
to the song list, the track will be added to the end of
the list.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
more than 20 selections.
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To delete the entire song list, perform the following
steps:
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. One beep will be heard,
followed by two beeps after two seconds, and a
final beep will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST
EMPTY will appear on the display indicating the
song list has been deleted.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed
from the display.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listening to a DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System
If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened to through your vehicle’s
speakers.
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system includes a DVD
player, a video display screen, two sets of wireless
headphones, and a remote control.
Parental Control
To listen to the DVD, press the CD AUX button until
RSE appears on the radio display. The current
radio source will stop and the DVD sound will come
through the speakers.
This button is located behind the video screen. Press
this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze
the video and mute the audio. The video screen will
display Parental Control ON and the power indicator
light on the DVD player will flash. It will also disable all
other button operations from the remote control and
the DVD player, with the exception of the eject button.
Press this button again to restore operation of the
DVD player.
To stop listening to the DVD, press the CD AUX button,
if a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button to select
a different source.
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
will go off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appear
on the radio display. The radio will return to the last
radio source that you were listening to.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the ignition is
in RUN, ACCESSORY, or if RAP is active.
more information.
Before You Drive
Navigation/Radio System
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system that
includes Radio Data System (RDS) information and
XM™ Satellite Radio Service capabilities (if equipped).
For information on how to use this system, see the
“Navigation System” manual.
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Headphones
To change the batteries, do the following:
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones
when they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the
batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” following for more information.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjust
the volume, adjust this knob.
3. Tighten the screw to close the compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
The transmitters are located below the video display
screen. The headphones will shut off automatically
if they lose the signal from the system after about
four minutes to save battery power. The signal may
be lost if the system is turned off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen.
The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to
be connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Standard RCA cables, not included, are needed
to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks.
The yellow connector inputs video and the red and
white connectors input right and left audio. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper connection of
the auxiliary device.
When using the wired headphones, if the front seat
passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD
(if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped), you will hear the audio for these sources,
instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing
through the RSE.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
RSE system power on. If the RSE system had been
previously in the DVD player mode, pressing the SRCE
button on the faceplate or the remote control will
switch the RSE system between the auxiliary device
and the DVD player.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
Audio system (if equipped)
How to Change the Video Format when in
the Auxiliary Mode
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal
by infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” previously for more
information.
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.
In some countries, the video format may be in the
PAL system. To change the video format, perform the
following:
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to
the vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE
system may be selected as an audio source on the radio
if the RSE system power is on. Once the RSE system
is selected as an audio source on the radio, adjust
the speaker volume on the radio, if necessary. If the
RSE system power is not on, the RSE system will not be
an available source on the radio. Refer to the radio
information for the radio that your vehicle has for more
information.
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the
Video Format option.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the right or left arrow button to select
the desired video format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system
(if equipped). The RSE system may be selected as
an audio source on the rear seat audio system if
the RSE system power is on. Refer to Rear Seat
3-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, push forward on the release
latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s
position as desired. When the video screen is not in
use, push it up into its latched position.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that
the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code is
printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in the up or the down position. The
video screen contains the transmitters for the wireless
headphones and the remote control. If the screen
is in the closed position, the signals will not be available
for the operation of the headphones or the remote
control.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD and
Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by this DVD
player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media is supported if
formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R and DVD+RW media
may or may not be supported by the DVD player.
The DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,
DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio media. An error message
will appear on the display if this type of media is inserted
into the DVD player.
Notice: Directly touching the video screen may
damage it. Do not touch the screen. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for more
information.
When using the wired headphones, not included, if the
front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with
Six-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio
Service (if equipped), you will hear the audio for
these sources, instead of the DVD or CD that is currently
playing through the RSE.
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on
the DVD player and/or by the buttons on the remote
control. See “Remote Control” later in this section
for more information.
If an error message appears on the video screen, see
“DVD Messages” later in this section.
3-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
DVD Player Buttons
To change a feature back to the factory default setting,
press this button to display the feature, then press
and hold this button. The default setting will appear on
the display.
O(Power): Press this button to turn the RSE system
on and off. The power indicator light will illuminate
when the power is on.
While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and hold this
button to display and to remove the track and time
information.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
c(Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
3-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing a Disc
Ejecting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start,
if the vehicle is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when
RAP is active.
Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to
eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the remote
control.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short
period of time. The disc will be stored in the DVD player.
The DVD player will not resume play of the disc
automatically.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote
control.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping
of the copyright information or the previews. Some
DVDs will begin playing after the previews have finished.
If the DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer
to the on-screen instructions.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the
ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
control.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button
on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control. The
movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped, if the disc has not been ejected and the stop
button has not been pressed twice. If the disc has been
ejected or if the stop button has been pressed twice,
the disc will resume play at the beginning.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Keep
the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
To extend the life of the batteries, the remote control
does not have a press and hold feature.
3-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
z (Set-up Menu): Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
e (Audio): Press this button to display a menu that
will only appear when a DVD is being played. The format
and content of this function will vary for each disc.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
on and off.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to return to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
3-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides you with the capability of direct chapter,
title, and track number selection.
| (Camera Angle): Press this button to change
camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function will vary for each disc.
}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
{ (Subtitle): Press this button to turn on subtitles
and to move through subtitle options when a DVD
is playing. The format and content of this function will
vary for each disc.
\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds after
inputting a number to clear the number(s).
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight will time out after
about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
the backlight is on.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
When the DVD is playing, press the pause button then
press the fast forward button. The DVD will continue
playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode,
press the play/pause button.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to advance
to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button will operate only when a DVD is playing and a
menu is active.
3-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
Disc will not play.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary mode.
3. Close the battery door securely.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
The picture does not
fill the screen. There
are black borders on
the top and bottom or
on both sides or it looks
stretched out.
Check the display mode
settings in the
display menu.
The disc was ejected,
but it was pulled back
into the DVD player.
The disc is being stored in
the DVD player. Press the
eject button again to eject
the disc.
3-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
Recommended Action
Problem
Recommended Action
In auxiliary mode, the
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Change the Video Format
to PAL or NTSC. See
“Stereo RCA Jacks”
previously for how to
change the video format.
Check the audio or
language selection in
the main DVD menu.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
After stopping the
player, I push Play but
sometimes the DVD
starts where I left off
and sometimes at the
beginning.
If the stop button was
pressed one time, the
DVD player will resume
playing where the DVD
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player will
begin to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
Check that the DVD
player is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
picture moves or scrolls.
The language in the
audio or on the screen
is wrong.
The remote control
does not work.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
My disc is stuck in the
player. The Load/Eject
button does not work.
Turn the DVD power off,
then on, then press the
load/eject button on the
DVD player.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
disc and DVD player.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
3-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Messages
Problem
Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless
headphone audio cuts
out or buzzes.
Check for obstructions,
low batteries, reception
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are facing
the front of the vehicle.
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen:
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a
disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,
or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the
disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the
DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
See your dealer for
assistance.
The DVD is playing,
but there is no picture
or sound.
The audio/video skips
or jumps.
Check that the DVD
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if
the region code of the DVD is not compatible with
the region code of the DVD player.
player is in DVD mode.
The DVD or CD could
be dirty, scratched, or
damaged.
The RSE is working
correctly.
No Disc: This message will be displayed if any of the
buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are
pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player.
The audio from the
radio for the Radio with
Six-Disc CD and XM™
has taken over the audio
from the DVD or CD
when using the wired
headphones.
DVD Distortion
Use the wireless
headphones or have the
front seat passengers
listen to another audio
source.
There may be an experience with audio distortion in the
wireless headphones when operating cellular phones,
scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems (GPS)*,
two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
* Excludes the OnStar® System.
3-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean
cloth and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
too long on the video screen.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the sources: radio, cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs.
However, the rear seat passengers can only control
the sources that the front seat passengers are not
listening to. For example, rear seat passengers may
listen to and control cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs
through the headphones while the driver listens to
the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each set
of headphones.
Envoy/Envoy Denali shown, Envoy XL/Envoy XL
Denali similar
P (Power): Press this button to turn the system on or
off. The rear speakers will be muted when the power
is turned on.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume. The left volume knob controls the
left headphones and the right volume knob controls
the right headphones.
The front seat audio controls always have priority
over the RSA controls. If the front seat passengers
switch the source for the main radio to a remote source,
the RSA will not be able to control the source. You
can operate the rear seat audio when the main radio
is off.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to select a source:
radio, cassette tape, CD, or DVD. The inactive tape, CD,
or DVD will remain safely inside the radio for future
listening.
3-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEEK: Press this button to advance to the next station
or track and stay there. The display will show the
selection. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the same audio source.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
To scan preset stations, press and hold the SEEK button
for two seconds and the radio will advance to the
next preset station. If you continue to hold the button
down, the radio will continue to advance through
the available preset stations. The display will show the
selections. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listing to the radio.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
When a cassette tape is playing, press the SEEK button
to go to the next selection on the tape. Press and
hold the SEEK button to go to the other side of the tape.
This function is inactive if the front seat passengers
are listening to a cassette tape.
When a CD is playing, press the SEEK button to go
to the next track on the CD. This function is inactive if
the front seat passengers are listening to a CD.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD player, press
and hold the SEEK button for 2 seconds to go you to
the next CD, if multiple CDs are loaded. This function
is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening
to a CD.
3-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROG (Program): Press this button to play a station
you have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs are
loaded.
Q SOURCE R: Press this button to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped), or a
CD. If a CD is loaded the CD symbol will appear on the
display.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go
to the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio functions
can be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
g (OnStar/Voice Recognition): If your vehicle has
OnStar®, press this button to interact with the OnStar®
system. See the OnStar® manual provided with your
vehicle for more information.
If your vehicle does not have OnStar®, press this button
to silence the system. Press it again, or any other
radio button, to turn on the sound.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow
to fast forward or reverse.
Q VOL R (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease the volume.
3-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Reception
AM
Care of the Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other.
Static can occur on AM stations caused by things
like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble
to reduce this noise.
The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that the tape player has been used for 50 hours
without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message
appears on the display, the cassette tape player
needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it should
be cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player. If there is a reduction in sound
quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape
or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no
improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may
display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The
recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealer.
3-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The broken tape detection feature of the cassette
tape player may identify the cleaning cassette as a
damaged tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette
from being ejected, use the following steps:
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before the tape player is
serviced.
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
3. Press and hold the TAPE CD button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display
and a cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the broken
tape detection feature will be active again.
A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses
a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head can
be used. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject
on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
After the player is cleaned, press and hold the EJT
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator
was reset.
3-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fixed Mast Antenna
Chime Level Adjustment
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
The radio is the vehicle’s chime producer. To change
the volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with
the ignition on and the radio power off. The chime
volume level will change from the normal level to
loud, and LOUD will appear on the radio display.
To change back to the default or normal setting, press
and hold pushbutton 6 again. The chime level will
change from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL will
appear on the radio display. Removing the radio and
not replacing it with a factory radio or chime will disable
vehicle chimes.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of the XM™ system may be affected if
the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.
3-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
• Judgment
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or
turn suddenly.
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC
might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid
the collision.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who
has been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a
crash, that person’s chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than if the person
had not been drinking.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking
{CAUTION:
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Control of a Vehicle
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have
to do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can
lose control of your vehicle.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights
and chime will come on each time the ignition is
turned on until the problem is repaired. See your dealer
for service.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
The low traction symbol next to the button will come on
when the TAS is limiting wheel spin. You may feel or
hear the system working, but this is normal.
The Traction Assist System may operate on dry roads
under some conditions. When this happens, you
may notice a reduction in acceleration. This is normal
and doesn’t mean there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Examples of these conditions include a hard
acceleration in a turn, an abrupt upshift or downshift of
the transmission or driving on rough roads.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TAS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
When the traction control
off symbol on the button is
on, the TAS is off and
will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
Traction Assist System (TAS)
Your two-wheel drive vehicle may have a Traction
Assist System (TAS) that limits wheel spin. This
is especially useful in slippery road conditions. The
system operates only if it senses that one or both of the
rear wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction.
When this happens, the system reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction control off symbol on the button will come
on under the following conditions:
To turn the system on or off, press the TAS button
located near the shift lever. If you used the button to turn
the system off, the traction control off symbol on the
button will come on and stay on.
• The Traction Assist System is turned off, either by
pressing the on/off button or by turning off the
automatic engagement feature of the TAS.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The traction control off symbol
on the button should go off.
• The transmission is in FIRST (1) gear; TAS will not
operate in this gear. This is normal.
If desired, you can change the TAS automatic
engagement feature so that the system will not come on
automatically when the engine is started. To do so:
• The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road.
When the vehicle leaves the rough surface, slows
down or stops, the light will go off and TAS will
be on again. This is normal.
1. Turn the ignition to RUN.
2. Move the shift lever to NEUTRAL (N).
• A Traction Assist System, Anti-Lock Brake System
or engine-related problem has been detected and
the vehicle needs service.
3. Apply the brake pedal and press the accelerator
pedal to the floor.
The Traction Assist System, as delivered from the
factory, will automatically come on whenever you start
your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, you should always leave the
system on. But you can turn the TAS off if you ever need
to. You should turn the TAS off if your vehicle ever
gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle
is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
4. Press and hold the TAS button for at least
six seconds.
5. Release the TAS button and both pedals.
6. Start the engine and wait a few seconds.
The next time you start your vehicle, the TAS will not
automatically come on. You can restore the automatic
feature by using the same procedure. Whether the TAS
is set to come on automatically or not, you can always
turn the system on or off by pressing the TAS button.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See Traction Assist
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you have
ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will
understand this.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in
your inside mirror, activate your right lane change
signal and move back into the right lane. Remember
that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle
you just passed may seem to be farther away from
you than it really is.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder,
and start your left lane change signal before moving
out of the right lane to pass. When you are far
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Traction Assist System (TAS),
remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration skid.
do not have this system, or if the system is off, then an
acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Go Off-Roading
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if equipped) are properly attached.
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel
does not have four-wheel drive, you should not
Be sure you read all the information about your
four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual.
drive off-road unless you are on a level, solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the
terrain itself.
Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated?
Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are
the local laws that apply to off-roading where you
will be driving? If you do not know, you should check
with law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that
is why it is very important that you read this guide.
You will find many driving tips and suggestions.
These will help make your off-road driving safer and
more enjoyable.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
CAUTION: (Continued)
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the
cargo properly.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
You will find other important information in this manual.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know
how to use it properly.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses — or disturb wildlife (this includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees or
unnecessary driving through streams or over
soft ground).
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
skills. Here is what we mean.
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse
is removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves and lanterns.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
• you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer
braking distances.
• you have less time to react.
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive
over obstacles.
• you will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you are
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
There is more discussion of these subjects later.
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If
you drive across them, you will roll over. You
could be seriously injured or killed. If you have
any doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approaching a Hill
Driving Uphill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,
the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but
you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
Here are some other things to consider as you approach
a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
{CAUTION:
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• Use your headlamps even during the day. They
make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you will be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with your wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or
is about to stall, and I cannot make it up
the hill?
A: If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down
the hill and decide I just cannot do it. What
should I do?
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle.
Leave it in some gear.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,
and slowly back straight down.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
cannot make it up the hill, you must back straight
down the hill.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). This is because
the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case
overrides the transmission. You or someone
else could be injured. If you are going to leave
your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift
the transmission to PARK (P). But do not shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL. Leave the
transfer case in the 2 Wheel High, 4 High or
4 Low position.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Downhill
{CAUTION:
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This
could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work and
could overheat and fade.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on
the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill.
But if it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
will trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go
across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have
to decide whether to try to drive across the incline.
Here are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or
down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the
distance from the front wheels to the rear
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will
tumble end over end. But when you drive across an
incline, the much more narrow track width — the
distance between the left and right wheels — may
not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the
uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open.
If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts
to roll over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous.
If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed
or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high)
side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the
rollover path.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
{CAUTION:
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels will
not get good traction. You cannot accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need longer
braking distances.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as
on beaches or sand dunes, your tires will tend to
sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering,
accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,
axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will
not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
your axle and other vehicle parts.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if
you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as
your tailpipe is under water, you will never be able to
start your engine. When you go through water,
remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take
you longer to stop.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
the underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll the
vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing
water.
more information on driving through water.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
Driving at Night
• Do not drink and drive.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle
can be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could
be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
City Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of
the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle
can leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to
the recommended pressure?
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road
page 4-15 for information about driving off-road.
Hill and Mountain Roads
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area,
or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
If you have the traction assist system (TAS), it will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. But you can turn the TAS off if you ever
need to. You should turn the TAS off if your vehicle ever
gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If Your
page 4-42. Even though your vehicle has TAS, you will
want to slow down and adjust your driving to the
road conditions. Under certain conditions, you may want
to turn the TAS off, such as when driving through
deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds. See Traction Assist System
If you do not have TAS, accelerate gently. Try not to
break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the
drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under
the tires even more.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your anti-lock brake system (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will want
to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
page 4-6.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a
curve or an overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For more information about using tire chains on your
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. If you have
a four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into 4HI. Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly
on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed
to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
Tire and Loading Information Label
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s
door open, you will find the label attached below
the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading
information label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
important information on towing a trailer, towing
safety rules and trailering tips.
Example 1
Description
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
B
C
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Available Cargo
Weight =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Certification/Tire Label
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and capacity weight. Please note your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label or consult your dealer for
additional details.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows the
size of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflation
pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of
your vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo and trailer tongue
weight, if pulling a trailer.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your vehicle’s weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle
the right way.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle
for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road Driving with Your
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as
fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or
turn quickly, or if there’s a crash, they will keep going.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Load leveling will not function normally with the
inflator hose attached to the inflator outlet. Remove
the inflator hose from the outlet during loading
and unloading.
Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension System
Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronically
controlled air suspension system that automatically
keeps your vehicle level as you load and unload. The
system includes a compressor, two height sensors
and two air springs supporting the rear axle.
If the vehicle is parked for an extended period of time,
some bleed down of the suspension is normal. Upon
starting the vehicle, proper height will be achieved.
Overload Protection
The system also has an internal clock to prevent
overheating. If the system overheats, all leveling
function stops until the system cools down. During this
time, the indicator light on the air inflator system will
be flashing.
The air suspension system is equipped with overload
protection. Overload protection is designed to protect the
air suspension system, and it is an indicator to the
driver that the vehicle is overloaded. When the overload
protection mode is on, it will not allow damage to the
air compressor. However, do not overload the vehicle.
The ignition has to be on for the system to inflate, in
order to raise the vehicle to the standard ride height after
loading. The system can lower the vehicle to the
standard ride height after unloading with the ignition on
and also for up to 30 minutes after the ignition has
been turned off.
If the suspension remains at a low height, the rear axle
load has exceeded GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating). When the overload protection mode is activated,
the compressor operates for about 30 seconds to one
minute without raising the vehicle depending on the
amount of overload. This will continue each time
the ignition is turned on until the rear axle load is
reduced below GAWR.
You may hear the compressor operating when you load
your vehicle, and periodically as the system adjusts
the vehicle to the standard ride height.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator Light
Towing
The indicator light on the inflator switch in the rear
passenger compartment also serves as an indicator for
internal system error. If the indicator light is flashing
without the load leveling function or the inflator being
active, turn off the ignition. The next day turn on
the ignition and check the indicator light. The vehicle
can be driven with the light flashing, but if it is you
should have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar
Equipment
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended for a
snow plow.
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
Notice: Adding a snow plow or similar equipment
to your vehicle can damage it, and the repairs would
not be covered by warranty. Do not install a snow
plow or similar equipment on your vehicle.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following. You may
also need brakes for the vehicle being towed. See your
dealer for additional trailering information.
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the trailering capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. To properly tow these vehicles,
they should be placed on a platform trailer.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can
be towed.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment? See
your dealer or trailering professional for additional
advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
page 4-34.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P).
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
procedure to select the NEUTRAL (N) position for
your vehicle.
Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be dinghy towed if you
follow the proper procedures. The transmission has
no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed,
so it is important that you follow all the steps listed
in this manual to dinghy tow your four-wheel-drive
vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the
towing vehicle.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
7. Turn the ignition off.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the
Ground)
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P).
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case to NEUTRAL.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with
the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission
could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Never tow your vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
procedure to select the NEUTRAL (N) position for
your vehicle.
Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be dolly towed with the
rear wheels on the ground.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the tow dolly.
7. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the
towing vehicle.
2. Shift the automatic transmission to PARK (P).
3. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
8. Turn the ignition off.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to
the dolly.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Shift the transmission in PARK (P).
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the
Ground)
(Two-Wheel or Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to
attach and secure the vehicle being towed to
the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the tow
vehicle. Use an adequate clamping device to
ensure that the front wheels are locked into the
straight position.
5. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the
towing vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for
six weeks or more, remove the battery cable
from the negative terminal (post) of the battery.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle from
the rear:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
page 2-31 for more information.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Towing a Trailer
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, braking,
handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions).
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look in the following chart to find the maximum trailer weight for your vehicle.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
3.42
3.73
4.10
3.42
3.73
4.10
3.42
3.73
4.10
3.42
3.73
4.10
3.42
3.73
3.42
3.73
Max. Trailer Wt.
5,300 lbs (2 404 kg)
5,800 lbs (2 631 kg)
6,300 lbs (2 858 kg)
5,100 lbs (2 313 kg)
5,600 lbs (2 540 kg)
6,100 lbs (2 767 kg)
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
4,800 lbs (2 177 kg)
5,300 lbs (2 404 kg)
5,800 lbs (2 631 kg)
5,900 lbs (2 676 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
5,700 lbs (2 585 kg)
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
*GCWR
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
12,500 lbs (5 670 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
12,500 lbs (5 670 kg)
2WD Envoy (L6 Engine)
4WD Envoy (L6 Engine)
2WD Envoy XL (L6 Engine)
4WD Envoy XL (L6 Engine)
2WD Envoy XL (V8 Engine)
4WD Envoy XL (V8 Engine)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total allowable weight of the completely loaded
vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,
equipment and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle
should not be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at the address listed
in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 to 15 percent
of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a maximum
of 400 lbs (181 kg) with a weight carrying hitch. The
trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (A), up to
a maximum of 900 lbs (408 kg) for a weight
distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get
them right simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Weight Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on
the Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s
more information. Then, be sure you don’t go over the
GVW limit for your vehicle, or the GAWR, including
the weight of the trailer tongue. If you use a weight
distributing hitch, make sure you don’t go over the rear
axle limit before you apply the weight distribution
spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
A. Body to Ground Distance
B. Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so the distance remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample
room when turning to avoid contact between the
trailer and the bumper.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer
will weigh more than these limits. You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes — and they must
be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
Safety Chains
• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that
sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper
tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.
Use steel brake tubing.
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and
you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You can not see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See Engine
when towing a trailer:
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connection, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See Dual Climate Control
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving On Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or a lower gear, under heavy
loads or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get
page 5-26.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. When parking uphill, turn your wheels
away from the curb. When parking downhill, turn
your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the
trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P).
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
5. Release the regular brakes.
• start your engine,
{CAUTION:
• shift into a gear, and
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belt(s), cooling system
and brake system. Each of these is covered in this
manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections before you start your trip.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set.
If the transfer case on four-wheel drive vehicles
is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
NEUTRAL.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Brown: Running Lamps
• White: Ground
Trailer Wiring Harness
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Dark Blue: Electric Brakes
• Red: Battery Feed (The chassis wiring ring
terminal must be fastened to a stud on the
underhood electrical center before the trailer feed
will become active.)
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, an adapter connector is
available from your dealer.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with wiring for an
electric trailer brake controller. These wires are located
inside the vehicle on the driver’s side under the
instrument panel. These wires should be connected to
an electric trailer brake controller by your dealer or
a qualified service center.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the seven-wire
trailer towing harness. This harness has a seven-pin
universal heavy-duty trailer connector that is attached to
a bracket on the hitch platform. The seven-wire
harness contains the following trailer circuits:
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Service
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
page 7-11.
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and
list the mileage and the date of any service work
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get
a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine.
A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is
considered normal. This does not indicate a problem
exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you are
using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile
Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards,
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-41. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines
that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems
due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline. Also, your GM dealer has additives that
will help correct and prevent most deposit-related
problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There may also be a light that comes on in the
instrument panel to let you know if your gas cap is
not properly installed. See Check Gas Cap Light
on page 3-48 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
page 3-41.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer
and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
1. To open the hood,
first pull the handle
with this symbol on it.
It is located inside
the vehicle under the
instrument panel on
the driver’s side.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.
3. Lift the hood, release the prop rod from its retainer
and put the prop rod into the slot in the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on
the prop rod. Remove the prop rod from its slot in
the hood and return the prop to its retainer. Lower the
hood 6 to 8 inches (15 to 20 cm) above the vehicle and
release it to latch fully. Check to make sure the hood
is closed and repeat the process if necessary.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 5-26.
on page 5-28.
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-34.
I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND).
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (Out of View).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on page 5-28.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-34.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
on page 5-26.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Marked GND).
J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But you must use the right kind. This section explains
what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
When to Add Engine Oil
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area (F) that shows the proper
operating range for the L6 engine or above the
cross-hatched area for the V8 engine, your engine
could be damaged.
the location of the
L6 Engine
engine oil fill cap.
V8 Engine
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere
in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all
the way back in when you are through.
If the oil is below the L mark for the L6 engine or the
cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick for the V8
engine, you will need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your
engine at extremely low temperatures.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A change engine oil light will come on.
your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the oil life system may not
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer has GM-trained people who will
perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated
can vary considerably. For the oil life system to
work properly, you must reset the system every time
the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change your oil prior to a change engine oil
light being turned on, reset the system.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To reset the change engine oil light, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds.
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the change engine oil light comes back on when you
start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not
reset. Repeat the procedure.
For vehicles with the Driver Information Center, see
the system.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
engine air cleaner/filter.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will damage
it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place
when you are driving.
1. Remove the screws on the engine air cleaner/filter
and lift off the cover.
2. Remove the air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care
should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive
the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle
has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine
off, but this is used only as a reference. Let the
engine run at idle for five minutes if outside
temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder
than 50°F (10°C), you may have to idle the engine
longer. Should the fluid level be low during this cold
check, you must check the fluid hot before adding fluid.
Checking the fluid hot will give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
more information on location.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
The automatic
transmission dipstick
handle with the
transmission and lock
symbol is located in the
engine compartment
on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint
(0.5 L). Do not overfill.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
page 5-26.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
The engine coolant
recovery tank is in the
engine compartment
on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle. The cap
has this symbol on it.
Overview on page 5-12
for more information
on location.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL
COLD, or a little higher.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn
you badly. With the coolant recovery tank,
you will almost never have to add coolant at
the radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
the display will show an Engine Coolant Hot/Engine
Overheated message. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-53 for more information.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can
drive normally.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as
fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
5.3L V8 Engine
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
4.2L L6 Engine
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The coolant level should
be at least up to the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not,
you may have a leak at the
pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
pump, or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the FULL COLD mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap. Remove the
pressure cap.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL
COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Fan Noise
Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel
economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures,
the fan speed increases when the clutch engages so
you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal
and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping
or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system
functioning properly. The fan will slow down when
additional cooling is not required and the clutch
disengages.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
Power Steering Fluid
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
reservoir location.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
For vehicles with the 4.2L L6 engine, the level
should be at the C (Cold) mark. For vehicles with the
5.3L V8 engine, the level should be at the FULL mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Washer Fluid
Brakes
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
reservoir.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will not
work at all.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN.
If it is not, have your brake
system checked to see
if there is a leak.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is above the MIN, but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
page 6-12.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they will have to
be replaced. Do not let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Battery
Brake Adjustment
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
battery location.
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
{CAUTION:
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if
page 5-39 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Jump Starting
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do
it safely.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
remote terminal instead of the terminal on the
battery. The remote negative (−) terminal is located
on the front engine lift bracket on vehicles with
the 4.2L L6 engine or the engine accessory drive
bracket for vehicles with the 5.3L V8 engine, and is
marked GND (Ground). See Engine Compartment
location.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. If
you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets, if equipped.
Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help to save
both batteries. And it could save the radio!
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
4. Open both hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on each
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. You should always use this
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery.
Use a remote
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle
has one.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not
connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you will
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect
the negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal
on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)
terminal, marked GND, for this purpose.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
4.2L L6 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
The remote negative (−) terminal is located on the
front engine lift bracket for the 4.2L L6 engine,
and on the accessory drive bracket for the
5.3L V8 engine.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
How to Check Lubricant
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 to 10 mm)
below the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Use
Four-Wheel Drive
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check fluid unless you
suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise.
A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected
and repaired.
Front Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate
reading, the vehicle should
be on a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps
To replace a headlamp, front turn signal/parking or
sidemarker bulb, do the following:
To replace a stoplamp/taillamp or turn signal bulb,
do the following:
page 2-13 for more information.
more information.
2. Lift the inner quick release clips.
2. Remove the
two screws from the
taillamp assembly.
3. Pull the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle.
4. Remove the cover from the headlamp bulb.
5. Disconnect the wiring harness.
6. Remove the bulb that needs to be replaced by
turning the socket counterclockwise.
7. Replace the old bulb with a new one.
8. Reinstall by reversing Steps 1 through 6.
3. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Back-Up Lamps
The back-up lamps are located in the rear bumper.
To replace a bulb, do the following:
1. Reach behind the rear bumper and locate the
bulb socket.
2. Turn it counterclockwise to remove from the bulb
assembly.
3. Pull the bulb from the bulb socket.
4. Push in a new bulb into the bulb socket.
5. Reinstall the bulb socket by lining up the tabs in the
lamp assembly and turn it clockwise to secure it.
4. Unclip the wiring harness (A) and remove the three
socket retaining screws (B).
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamps
Front Sidemarker Lamps
Front Turn Signal Lamps
Halogen Headlamps
High-Beam
Bulb Number
3157
5. Remove the socket by releasing the retaining tabs.
6. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release it
from the socket.
194
3457
7. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
8. Reinstall the socket and screws.
9005 HB3
9006 HB4
9. Reconnect the wiring harness.
Low-Beam
Rear Turn Signal, Stoplamp and
Taillamp
10. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
3057
11. Close the liftgate.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage the
windshield. Any damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the wiper
blade arm to touch the windshield.
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked
by the bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic
caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fully
inserted.
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement
{CAUTION:
for instructions on how to change the backglass wiper
blade. The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a
vertical position like the windshield wiper blade, so care
should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual.
checked when your tires are cold. See
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a
typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information, see
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration.
For information on recommended tire pressure see
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed
to support that load when used as a single. For
information on recommended tire pressure see
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as
the first two characters in the tire size means a light
truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of a
tire size.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C
of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 75% as high as it is wide.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.
The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from A to Z.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the
tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name
molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings
on the other sidewall of the tire.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-43.
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
• Unusual wear
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-43. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
When to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Check your tires once a month or more.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
on page 5-62 for more information.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. For
information on storing or removing the spare tire,
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire
on page 5-66.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
page 4-43, for an example of the label and its location
on your vehicle. Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires
may not have treadwear
indicators.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look
at the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information label. For examples of these labels and their
page 4-43.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
General Motors recommends that you get tires with
that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, load range, traction,
ride and other things during normal service on your
vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud
and snow).
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you replace your tires with those not having a TPC
Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
{CAUTION:
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires) the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires
on all wheels.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment may need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels
may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for
proper diagnosis.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Replacement
{CAUTION:
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
information.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or other
vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle and you or others may be injured in a
crash. Use another type of traction device only
if its manufacturer recommends it for use on
your vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, re-adjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your wheels. If you do find traction
devices that will fit, install them on the
rear tires.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the accessory inflator, do the following:
Accessory Inflator
1. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter to the end of
the hose if required.
Your vehicle has an accessory inflator system. You can
inflate things like basketballs and bicycle tires. You
can also use it to bring your tire pressure up to
the proper pressure. It is not designed to inflate large
objects which will require more than five minutes
to inflate, such as an air mattress.
2. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish
to inflate.
3. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.
4. Press and release the switch to turn the air inflator
on. The indicator light will remain on when the
inflator is running.
The accessory inflator is
located in the rear
compartment on the
driver’s side of the vehicle
behind an access cover,
near the liftgate opening.
The system has an internal clock to prevent
overheating. The system will allow about five minutes
of running time, then the compressor will stop. The
indicator light will then begin to flash. When the
indicator is off, the inflator can be started again by
pressing the switch. If the compressor is still hot, it
may only run for a short time before shutting
off again.
5. Press and release the switch to turn the inflator off.
Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch and store it in
its proper location. Remove the inflator hose from
the outlet during loading and unloading. Load leveling
will not function with the inflator hose attached to
the inflator outlet. See “Electronically Controlled Air
Suspension System” under Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-43 for more information.
To remove the cover, push in on the tab to access
the inflator.
You may have an air inflator kit that is located in the
glove compartment. It includes a 22 ft (6.7 m) hose with
three nozzle adapters.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To reinstall the cover, line up the tabs at the back of the
cover, put it in place and latch the tabs.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would;
use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
A continuous flashing indicator light may also indicate
a malfunction in the air suspension system. See
“Electronically Controlled Air Suspension System” under
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured. Be
sure to read the inflator instructions, and inflate
any object only to its recommended pressure.
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a
few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
6. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on
the other side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example
as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jacking equipment you will need is stored under
the rear seat (Envoy/Envoy Denali) or in the left
rear quarter panel storage compartment
(Envoy XL/Envoy XL Denali).
The following information will tell you how to use the
jack and change a tire.
Envoy/Envoy Denali
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tools you will be using include the wheel wrench (A),
wheel blocks (B), extension(s) (socket end) (C),
handle (jack end) (D), and jack (E).
Envoy XL/Envoy XL Denali
The following instructions explain how to remove the
underbody-mounted spare from underneath your vehicle.
To release the jack from its holder, turn the knob on the
jack counterclockwise to lower the jack head. See
Notice: If you remove or restow a tire from/to the
storage position under the vehicle when it is
supported by a jack, you could damage the tire
and/or your vehicle. Always remove or restow a tire
when the vehicle is on the ground.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable when the
tire has been completely lowered, and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
4. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
1. Insert the socket end of the extension on a
45 degree angle downward into the hoist drive shaft
hole. It is exposed when the rear gate is open and is
just above the rear bumper. Be sure the socket end
of the extension connects to the hoist shaft.
2. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire. Keep turning the wheel wrench until the
spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
page 5-75 for more information.
5. Position the chisel end of your wheel wrench in the
notch of the center cap and pry off the center cap.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Using the wheel
wrench, loosen all the
wheel nuts. Do not
remove them yet.
Front
Rear
A. Front Frame/Rear Axle
B. Jack
C. Handle
D. Extension(s)
E. Wheel Wrench
2. Turn the jack adjusting knob clockwise by hand to
raise the jack lift head.
3. Place the handle, extension and wheel wrench onto
the jack.
4. Place the jack in the appropriate position nearest
the flat tire.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.
{CAUTION:
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare
tire to fit.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
8. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Put the nuts on by
hand. Make sure the
rounded end is
toward the wheel.
10. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held
against the hub. If a nut can’t be turned by hand,
use the wheel wrench and see your dealer as
soon as possible.
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
12. Use the wrench to
tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Secondary Latch System
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is
damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire must
be stored with the valve stem pointing up. See Storing
instructions on storing the spare or flat tire correctly.
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack completely,
make sure no one is behind you or on either
side of you as you pull the jack out from the
spare.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable is visible. If it is
not visible, proceed
to Step 6.
2. If visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear
two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot
overtighten the cable.
6. Attach the jack handle, extension(s) and the wheel
wrench to the jack and place it under the vehicle
towards the front of the rear bumper. Position
the center lift point of the jack under the center of
the spare tire.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
7. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.
If the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
page 5-67.
8. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The
secondary latch has released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
10. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
11. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it
through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
Notice: If you drive away before the spare tire or
secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled,
you could damage your vehicle. Always reinstall
this cable before driving your vehicle.
12. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable
back up if the cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert
the socket end of the extension connected to
the wheel wrench into the hoist shaft hole in
the bumper on a 45 degree angle downward.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare the rest of the way.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be
stored with the valve stem pointing up. If the
spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing
downward, its secondary latch won’t work
properly and the spare tire could loosen and
suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this happened
when your vehicle was being driven, the tire
might contact a person or another vehicle,
causing injury and, of course, damage to itself
as well. Be sure the underbody-mounted spare
tire is stored with its valve stem pointing up.
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
Notice: An aluminum wheel with a flat tire should
always be stored under the vehicle with the
hoist. However, storing it that way for an extended
period could damage the wheel. To avoid this,
always stow the wheel properly with the valve stem
pointing up and have the wheel repaired as soon
as possible.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Follow this diagram to store the underbody-mounted
spare.
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Shaft
C. Extension(s)
D. Retainer
E. Spare or Flat Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Up)
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle,
with the valve stem pointed up and to the rear.
5. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench and socket end of the
extension to tighten the cable.
2. Pull the retainer (D) through the wheel.
3. Put the socket end of the extension (C), on an
45 degree angle downward, through the hole in
the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft (B).
4. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench (A)
clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip
twice. This indicates that the tire is secure and the
cable is tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be
overtightened.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Return the equipment to the proper location in the
vehicle as shown next. Attach the tools in the slots
provided. Roll up the instruction label and return
it to the slot in the tool kit. Assemble the wheel
blocks to the jack.
For the Envoy XL, place the jack and wheel blocks in
the wire bale. Turn the knob on the jack clockwise to
raise the jack head.
Envoy XL/Envoy XL Denali
A. Instruction Label
D. Extension(s)
B. Handle
C. Knob
E. Wheel Blocks and Jack
F. Wheel Wrench
Envoy/Envoy Denali
A. Handle
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Instruction Label
D. Extension(s)
E. Knob
F. Wheel Blocks and Jack
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
• Benzene
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire
• Naphtha
• Carbon Tetrachloride
• Acetone
• Paint Thinner
• Turpentine
• Lacquer Thinner
• Nail Polish Remover
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage the
vehicle:
Appearance Care
• Alcohol
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in an enclosed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
• Laundry Soap
• Bleach
• Reducing Agents
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best
if it is cleaned often. Although not always visible,
dust and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery.
Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic
surfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommended to
remove particles from your upholstery. It is important to
keep your upholstery from becoming and remaining
heavily soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly
as possible. Your vehicle’s interior may experience
extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners
on surfaces for which they were not intended. Use
glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning
cloth.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For
soils, always try to remove them first with plain water or
club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much
of the soil as possible using one of the following
techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve
the effectiveness of soil removal.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring
formation may result, clean the entire surface.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of
your interior and are not recommended. Do not use
silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
{CAUTION:
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM
dealer’s body and paint shop.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
Spot Lifter
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label, you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Headlamps
The headlamp wiring is protected by four fuses. An
electrical overload will cause a lamp to go on and off.
If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, be
sure to get it fixed.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The fuse block is located under the hood in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. See
information on location.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Remove the primary cover by pressing the two locking
tabs. Remove the secondary cover by snapping off
while lifting. To reinstall the fuse panel cover, reverse
the sequence.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
L6 Engine
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Electrically-Controlled Air
Suspension
Passenger’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Back-Up Trailer Lamps
1
3
4
2
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Driver’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Driver’s Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Rear Window Washer, Headlamp
Washer
Active Transfer Case
Windshield Washer
Powertrain Control Module B
Fog Lamps
Fuses
22
23
Usage
Ignition E
5
Electronic Throttle Control
Instrument Panel Cluster, Driver
Information Center
Automatic Shift Lock Control
System
6
7
24
25
8
9
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
50
51
52
Engine 1
Backup
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Powertrain Control Module 1
Oxygen Sensor
Air Conditioning
Truck Body Controller
Trailer
Stoplamp
Cigarette Lighter
Ignition Coils
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Truck Body Controller, Ignition 1
Crank
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Ignition A
Blower Motor
Ignition B
Airbag
Trailer Electric Brake
Cooling Fan
Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn
Driver’s Side Trailer Turn
Hazard Flashers
Horn
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
53
Usage
Headlamp Driver Module
Air Injection Reactor (AIR)
Solenoid
Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Pump
Relay
43
44
45
46
Usage
High-Beam Headlamp
Air Conditioning
Cooling Fan
Headlamp Driver Module
Starter
54
56
47
49
Electric Adjustable Pedal
Air Injection Reactor (AIR)
Solenoid
Relay
37
38
Usage
Headlamp Washer
Rear Window Washer
Fog Lamps
55
39
40
Horn
Miscellaneous
Usage
41
Fuel Pump
48
Instrument Panel Battery
42
Windshield Washer
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V8 Engine
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Electrically-Controlled Air
Suspension
Passenger’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Back-Up Trailer Lamps
1
3
4
2
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Driver’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Instrument Panel Cluster, Driver
Information Center
5
24
Driver’s Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Rear Window Washer, Headlamp
Washer
Active Transfer Case
Windshield Washer
Powertrain Control Module B
Fog Lamps
Stoplamp
Cigarette Lighter
Ignition Coils
Canister Vent
Truck Body Controller, Ignition 1
Crank
Automatic Shift Lock Control
System
Engine 1
6
7
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Backup
8
9
Powertrain Control Module 1
Powertrain Control Module
Air Conditioning
Injector Bank A
Trailer
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Ignition A
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Blower Motor
Ignition B
Passenger’s Side Trailer Turn
Driver’s Side Trailer Turn
Hazard Flashers
Transmission
Oxygen Sensor Bank B
Oxygen Sensor Bank A
Injector Bank B
Airbag
Trailer Electric Brake
Cooling Fan
Horn
Ignition E
Electronic Throttle Control
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Underseat Fuse Block
Fuses
57
58
Usage
Headlamp Driver Module
Truck Body Controller 1
Electric Adjustable Pedal
59
Relay
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
49
60
Usage
Headlamp Washer
Rear Window Washer
Fog Lamps
Horn
Fuel Pump
Windshield Washer
High-Beam Headlamp
Air Conditioning
Cooling Fan
Headlamp Driver Module
Starter
Envoy
Electric Adjustable Pedal
Powertrain
Miscellaneous
Usage
48
Instrument Panel Battery
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Usage
Right Door Control Module
Left Door Control Module
Liftgate Module 2
Truck Body Controller 3
Rear Fog Lamps
Blank
Truck Body Controller 2
Power Seats
Rear Wiper
Driver Door Module
Amplifier
Passenger Door Module
Rear Climate Controls
Left Rear Parking Lamps
Blank
Vehicle Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
16
17
18
Right Rear Parking Lamps
Locks
Liftgate Module/Driver Seat
Module
19
20
21
23
Blank
Lock
Blank
Envoy
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
24
25
Usage
Fuses
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Usage
Rear Fog Lamps
Auxiliary Power 1
Ignition 0
Four-Wheel Drive
Blank
Truck Body Controller Ignition
Brakes
Unlock
Blank
Blank
26
OnStar® Overhead
27
Battery/OnStar® System
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Sunroof
Rainsense™ Wipers
Parking Lamps
Truck Body Controller Accessory
Truck Body Controller 5
Front Wipers
Truck Body Controller Run
Vehicle Stop
Transmission Control Module
Heat Ventilation Air
Conditioning B
36
37
38
Front Parking Lamps
Left Turn Signal
Heat Ventilation Air
Conditioning 1
39
40
41
42
43
44
Truck Body Controller 4
Radio
Trailer Park
Right Turn Signal
Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning
Envoy XL
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Usage
Right Door Control Module
Left Door Control Module
Liftgate Module 2
Truck Body Controller 3
Rear Fog Lamps
Blank
Truck Body Controller 2
Power Seats
Rear Wiper
Driver Door Module
Amplifier
Passenger Door Module
Rear Climate Controls
Left Rear Parking Lamps
Blank
Vehicle Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
16
17
18
Right Rear Parking Lamps
Locks
Liftgate Module/Driver Seat
Module
19
20
21
Vent Window
Lock
Envoy XL
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
22
23
24
25
Usage
Fuses
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Usage
Truck Body Controller 4
Radio
Retained Accessory Power
Blank
Unlock
Blank
Blank
Trailer Park
Right Turn Signal
Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning
Rear Fog Lamps
Auxiliary Power 1
Ignition 0
Four-Wheel Drive
Blank
Truck Body Controller Ignition
Brakes
Truck Body Controller Run
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
26
OnStar® Overhead
27
Battery/OnStar® System
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Sunroof
Rainsense™ Wipers
Parking Lamps
Truck Body Controller Accessory
Truck Body Controller 5
Front Wipers
52
Vehicle Stop
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
Transmission Control Module
Heat Ventilation Air
Conditioning B
Front Parking Lamps
Left Turn Signal
Heat Ventilation Air
Conditioning 1
36
37
38
Blank
Blank
39
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Standard Wheel Base
Extended Wheel Base
Cooling System
1.9 lbs
2.8 lbs
0.85 kg
1.27 kg
4200 L6 Standard Wheel Base
4200 L6 Extended Wheel Base
5300 V8 Standard Wheel Base
5300 V8 Extended Wheel Base
Differential Fluid — Front
Differential Fluid – Rear
4200 L6
10.8 qt
13.8 qt
12.2 qt
15.3 qt
1.7 pt
10.2 L
13.1 L
11.6 L
14.5 L
0.8 L
3.6 pt
4.3 pt
1.7 L
2.0 L
5300 V8
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Engine Oil with Filter
4200 L6
7.0 qt
6.0 qt
6.6 L
5.7 L
5300 V8
Fuel Tank
Standard Wheel Base
Extended Wheel Base
21.7 gal
25.0 gal
5.0 qt
82.2 L
95.8 L
4.7 L
Transmission (Drain and Refill)
Wheel Nut Torque
100 ft lb
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 4200 L6
VORTEC™ 5300 V8
S
Automatic
0.042 inches (1.07 mm)
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
M
Automatic
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-43.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
on page 5-5.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be checked, when to check it and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
When the change engine oil light appears, certain
services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the change engine oil light comes on, it means
that service is required for your vehicle. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life
system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year and
at this time the system must be reset. Your GM
Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine GM parts
and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the change
engine oil light comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light comes on 10 months
or more since the last service or if the light has not
come on at all for one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Control Service.
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
on page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000 150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged
components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
(severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter
(normal service).
Automatic transfer case only: Change transfer
case fluid. See footnote (g).
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control
Service.
V8 engine only: Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first). An
Emission Control Service. See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service. See footnote (l).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job,
have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,
release pawl, rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate
handle pivot points, rear door detent link, roller
mechanism, liftgate handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel
door hinge, cargo door hinge, locks, and folding
seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth will make them last longer, seal better and not stick
or squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine
GM parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and
air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
proper installation.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
further details.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
(l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist
you with these checks and services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At Least Once a Month
At Least Once a Year
Tire Inflation Check
Starter Switch Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-57.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench®
dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
is required.
on page 2-31.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle
is held by the parking brake only.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
Power Steering
System
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol.
Automatic
Transmission “Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Engine Oil
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all
the requirements for your vehicle.
To determine the proper viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
50/50 mixture of clean,
Chassis
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Lubrication
drinkable water and use only
Engine Coolant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
Axle Lubricant (GM Part
Front and
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
No. U.S. 12378261, in
Rear Axle
Windshield
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Canada 10953455) meeting
Washer Solvent
GM Specification 9986115.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
AUTO-TRAK II Fluid
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood and Door
Hinges, Body
Door Hinge
Pins, Liftgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hinge and
Linkage,
Folding Seats
and Fuel Door
Hinge
Transfer Case (GM Part No. U.S. 12378508, in
Canada 10953626).
Chassis Lubricant
Rear Driveline
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Center Spline
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
and Universal
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Joints
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points and
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Constant
Velocity
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Universal Joint meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Latch, Pivots, Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and Release Category LB or GC-LB.
Pawl
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
12371287, in Canada 10953437).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
4200 L6
GM Part Number
24200796
ACDelco® Part Number
—
15036141
A2014C
89017342
88984215
88983068
PF61
PF46
5300 V8
Fuel Filter
GF831
Spark Plugs
4200 L6
12569190
12571164
41-981
41-985
5300 V8
Wiper Blades
Front — 22 inches (56 cm)
Rear — 16 inches (41 cm)
—
—
8-2221
8-2161
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record
pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Assistance and
Information
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting GMC, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by calling
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Customer
Assistance prompt). In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filling out a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use the Text Telephones
(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can
communicate with GMC by dialing: 1-800-GMC-8583
(462-8583). (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Customer Assistance Offices
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to
GMC, the letter should be addressed to GMC’s
Customer Assistance Center.
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
United States
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583) (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto
Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new GMC vehicle, you are
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
automatically enrolled in the GMC Roadside Assistance
program. This value-added service is intended to
provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city
or travel the open road. Call 1-800-GMC-8782
(1-800-462-8782) to speak with a GMC Road Assistance
representative 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of
eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for
your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under GMC’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle.
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and
delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. GMC Roadside Assistance: 1-800-462-8782, text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
• Trip Routing: Your Roadside Assistance
Representative can provide you with specific
information regarding this feature.
• Trip Interruption Expense Benefits: Your
Roadside Assistance Representative can provide
you with specific information regarding this feature.
GMC reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in GMC’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or
type of occurrence.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GMC reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same
day repair.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for new
vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Transportation Options
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of public transportation expenses may
be available, for up to a maximum of five days. In
addition, should you arrange transportation through a
friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses may be available, up to a five-day
maximum. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original receipts.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and specifications for
GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782),
or write:
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Or you can write to:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) (cont.)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical System (cont.)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
G
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LATCH System (cont.)
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside (cont.)
N
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-17
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Restraint System Check (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-31
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
